WO2023207555A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023207555A1
WO2023207555A1 PCT/CN2023/086982 CN2023086982W WO2023207555A1 WO 2023207555 A1 WO2023207555 A1 WO 2023207555A1 CN 2023086982 W CN2023086982 W CN 2023086982W WO 2023207555 A1 WO2023207555 A1 WO 2023207555A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mbs
data packet
qfi
value
mrb
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/086982
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张海森
李秉肇
许斌
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023207555A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023207555A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/06Selective distribution of broadcast services, e.g. multimedia broadcast multicast service [MBMS]; Services to user groups; One-way selective calling services

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the data protocol data unit (PDU) of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer is identified by the COUNT value.
  • the COUNT value consists of the high-order hyperframe number (HFN) and the low-order PDCP sequence number (SN).
  • HFN high-order hyperframe number
  • SN low-order PDCP sequence number
  • the PDCP PDU sent by the sender to the receiver includes the PDCP SN, and the receiver calculates the HFN based on the PDCP SN to determine the COUNT value of the PDCP PDU.
  • the core network equipment is quality of service (QoS).
  • QoS quality of service
  • Each data packet of the flow generates a QoS flow identifier (QFI) SN so that different access network devices can generate COUNT values based on the QFI SN.
  • QFI QoS flow identifier
  • the number of bits of QFI SN is the same as the number of bits of COUNT value.
  • the access network device usually intercepts the high bits of the QFI SN as the HFN of the COUNT value, and the low bits as the PDCP SN of the COUNT value.
  • the access network equipment usually takes certain measures. For example, when the access network generates a COUNT value, it will add a certain value to the HFN generated through the QFI SN as the HFN corresponding to the COUNT value. That is, for a certain data packet, the HFN corresponding to the COUNT value may be greater than the high value of QFI SN. It may happen that the COUNT value has reached the upper limit, but the QFI SN has not yet reached the upper limit. If the COUNT value reaches the upper limit (or overflow), it will cause packet loss, thus affecting the reliability of the service.
  • This application provides a communication method and device that can effectively reduce COUNT value overflow caused by excessive MBS QFI SN, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by a core network device, or by a component of the core network device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the core network device. It can also be executed by a device capable of implementing Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: sending a first data packet to an access network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold.
  • Receive first indication information from the access network device and set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet
  • the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  • the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device, so that the core network device can set the second data packet based on the first indication information when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold.
  • MBS The QFI SN is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. That is to say, the core network device can reset the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow does not reach the first threshold, effectively reducing the problem caused by excessive MBS QFI SN.
  • the COUNT value in the access network equipment overflows, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving service reliability.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by the access network device, or by components of the access network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: receiving a first data packet from a core network device and sending first indication information to the core network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold.
  • the first indication information is used by the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first indication information includes information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, or includes information indicating the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow
  • the difference between the third threshold and the information of M2 is less than or equal to M2
  • the first indication information is sent to the core network device, and a long time is reserved for the transmission of the first indication information, so that the core network device can receive the first indication information before the COUNT value overflows, and according to the first indication information
  • Setting the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet effectively reduces the COUNT value overflow in the access network equipment caused by excessive MBS QFI SN, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving service reliability.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first MRB, an identifier of the first QoS flow, or an identifier of the MBS service.
  • the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet, including: the second data packet is the M3th data packet after the first data packet.
  • M3 is less than or equal to M1+1
  • M1 is the maximum difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold
  • the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
  • M3 is less than or equal to M2+1
  • M2 is the maximum difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by the core network equipment, or by components of the core network equipment, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the core network equipment. It can also be implemented by Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: receiving second indication information from the access network device. Release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Alternatively, delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second indication information, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the core network device can release the first MBS session of the MBS service based on the second instruction information of the access network device, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Because when the first MBS session is released, the QoS flow of the first MBS session is deleted. After the second MBS session is created, the QoS flow in the second MBS session is also newly created. Therefore, the core network device subsequently passes the third MBS session.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, and the corresponding COUNT value of the data packet is smaller.
  • the access network device can send the second indication information according to the actual situation, for example, when the COUNT value is about to overflow, so that the MBS QFI SN of subsequent data packets is smaller, thereby reducing the problem of excessive MBS QFI SN in the access network device.
  • COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving service reliability.
  • the core network device may delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session based on the second indication information of the access network device, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. Since the second QoS flow is newly added, when the core network equipment subsequently transmits the MBS service data packet through the second QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, thereby reducing the MBS QFI SN from being too large. The resulting COUNT value overflows and improves business reliability.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by the access network device, or by components of the access network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by the access network device. It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: generating second indication information and sending the second indication information to the core network device.
  • the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service and to establish the second MBS session of the MBS service.
  • the second instruction information is used by the core network device to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the second indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by the access network device, or by components of the access network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by the access network device. It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: generating third indication information and sending the third indication information to the core network device. Wherein, the third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN.
  • the access network device can send third indication information to the core network device to indicate the maximum value and/or minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, so that the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN can be flexibly changed.
  • the access network device can flexibly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN to the core network device according to actual needs.
  • the equipment When the equipment needs to avoid COUNT value overflow, it can indicate to the core network equipment the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN used to limit the COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow in the access network equipment caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large, thereby reducing the risk of COUNT value overflow. Packet loss caused by value overflow improves service reliability.
  • the access network device indicates the minimum value of MBS QFI SN to the core network device
  • the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet
  • the maximum MBS QFI SN can only be 2 N -1, therefore,
  • the maximum COUNT value of a data packet is also 2 N -1, which avoids overflow of the COUNT value and thus improves service reliability.
  • the maximum value is less than 2 N -1 and the minimum value is greater than 0, where N is the length of the MBS QFI SN.
  • the sixth aspect provides a communication method, which can be executed by the core network device, or can be executed by components of the core network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the core network device, or can be implemented by Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: obtaining the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN. Among them, the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
  • Send the first data packet, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or is greater than or equal to the minimum value, and the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service.
  • the core network equipment can obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, and can also make the maximum value and/or the minimum value flexible.
  • the core network equipment can set the maximum value of MBS QFI SN that limits COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing COUNT value overflow caused by excessive MBS QFI SN.
  • the core network equipment can set the minimum value of MBS QFI SN.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN can only be 2 N -1, therefore, the maximum value of the data packet
  • the COUNT value is also 2 N -1, which avoids the overflow of the COUNT value in the access network equipment, thus improving the reliability of the service.
  • the seventh aspect provides a communication method, which can be executed by the core network equipment, or can be executed by components of the core network equipment, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the core network equipment, or can be implemented by Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: obtaining the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN. Among them, the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
  • a first data packet and a second data packet are sent.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the MBS service
  • the second data packet is a data packet of the second QoS flow of the MBS service.
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or, the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet Greater than or equal to the minimum value, the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with one MRB.
  • the technical effects brought by the seventh aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the above-mentioned sixth aspect, which will not be described again here.
  • obtaining the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN includes: receiving third indication information from the access network device; obtaining the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information, and/or, min.
  • the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is based on the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the packet data convergence protocol sequence number PDCP SN, or the offset At least one of the values is determined.
  • the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value.
  • the offset value is used to determine the superframe number HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet.
  • MBS QFI SN max represents the maximum value of MBS QFI SN
  • Y is an integer greater than 1.
  • Y satisfies the following formula: Y ⁇ X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 1
  • X represents the offset value
  • * represents the multiplication operation
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN
  • Q 1 is the maximum An integer equal to or equal to 1.
  • the minimum value of MBS QFI SN and the length of PDCP SN satisfy one of the following formulas:
  • MBS QFI SN min represents the minimum value of MBS QFI SN
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of PDCP SN
  • X represents the offset value
  • * represents multiplication operation
  • Q 2 is an integer greater than or equal to 0.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the K of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the sum of the value of the high-order bits and the offset value, K is the length of HFN.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the offset value, so that the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV will not be a negative value.
  • the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is the above-mentioned maximum value, and this maximum value can ensure that the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is 2 N -1, so that the maximum COUNT value of the first data packet is 2 N -1, avoids the overflow of the COUNT value of the first data packet. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI of the data packet.
  • the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of SN and the offset value, K is the length of HFN; alternatively, the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not make the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be executed by the access network device, or can be executed by a component of the access network device, such as a processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions.
  • the method includes: receiving a first data packet from a core network device, and when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets a first condition, releasing a first MRB associated with the first QoS flow, and establishing a second MRB associated with the first QoS flow. MRB, the first data packet is carried in the first MRB.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS.
  • the access network device releases the first MRB carrying the data packet and creates a second MRB. That is to say, in the process of increasing the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N -1, the access network device can perform the release and creation of the MRB at least once. After a new MRB is created, the COUNT value of the MRB's data packets can start from the minimum value that can be obtained. Therefore, in the process of the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow increasing from 0 to 2 N -1, the COUNT value can be flipped at least once, thereby reducing the risk of COUNT value overflow.
  • the first condition is related to the first value.
  • the first value is based on MBS QFI SN
  • the length of the packet data convergence protocol sequence number PDCP SN is determined; or the first value is a preset value.
  • the first condition includes: the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value; or, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 is evenly divided by the first value; or, the first The MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to the first value.
  • S 1 represents the first numerical value
  • N represents the length of the MBS QFI SN
  • M is a positive integer
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN
  • * represents the multiplication operation
  • X represents the offset value
  • the offset value is used to determine The superframe number HFN of the packet's COUNT value.
  • 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow are carried on 2 M MRBs.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 0.
  • QFI SN is 2 N-1 .
  • the method further includes: receiving a second data packet from the core network device, and when the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is equal to 2 N -1, releasing the third MRB associated with the first QoS, and A fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow is established, the second data packet is carried in the third MRB, and the second data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • a communication system which includes access network equipment and core network equipment.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device, and correspondingly, the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold.
  • the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the first indication information from the access network device and sets the MBS of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information.
  • QFI SN, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  • a communication system which includes access network equipment and core network equipment.
  • the access network device generates second indication information and sends the second indication information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the second instruction information from the access network device, releases the first MBS session of the MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establishes the second MBS session of the MBS service; or deletes it according to the second instruction information. the first QoS flow of the first MBS session and adds the second QoS flow in the first MBS session.
  • a communication system which includes access network equipment and core network equipment.
  • the access network device generates third indication information and sends the third indication information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the third indication information from the access network device, and obtains the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or is greater than or equal to the minimum value.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service.
  • a communication system which includes access network equipment and core network equipment.
  • the access network device generates third indication information and sends the third indication information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the third indication information from the access network device, and obtains the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet and the second data packet.
  • the first data packet is the first QoS of the MBS service.
  • the second data packet is the data packet of the second QoS flow of the MBS service.
  • the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with one MRB.
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to the minimum value.
  • a communication device for implementing various methods.
  • the communication device may be the core network equipment in the first aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, or a device included in the core network equipment, such as a chip; or, the communication device may be the second aspect or The access network equipment in the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect, or the device included in the access network equipment, such as a chip.
  • the communication device includes modules, units, or means (means) corresponding to the implementation method.
  • the modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to functions.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • This processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the transceiver module which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the transceiver module can be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver module includes a sending module and/or a receiving module, respectively used to implement the sending or receiving function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation thereof.
  • a communication device including: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instructions to enable the communication
  • the apparatus performs the method described in any aspect.
  • the communication device may be the core network equipment in the first aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, or a device included in the core network equipment, such as a chip; or, the communication device may be the second aspect or The access network equipment in the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect, or the device included in the access network equipment, such as a chip.
  • a communication device including: at least one processor; the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in a memory, so that the communication device executes the method described in any aspect.
  • the memory may be coupled to the processor, or the memory may exist independently of the processor. For example, the memory and the processor may be two independent modules.
  • the memory may be located outside the communication device or within the communication device.
  • the communication device may be the core network equipment in the first aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, or a device included in the core network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the device When the device is a chip system, it may be The chip structure may also include chips and other discrete components; or, the communication device may be the access network equipment in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect, or the access network equipment included in the access network equipment.
  • a device such as a chip or a system-on-a-chip. When the device is a system-on-a-chip, it may be composed of a chip or may include a chip and other discrete components.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided.
  • Computer programs or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the communication device can perform the method described in any aspect. .
  • a seventeenth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a communication device, enable the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
  • the sending action/function can be understood as outputting information
  • the receiving action/function can be understood as inputting information
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a COUNT provided by this application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by this application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the transmission path of an MBS service provided by this application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a user plane protocol stack provided by this application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a PDCP PDU provided by this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a calculation example diagram of RX_DELIV provided by this application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic diagram for determining the COUNT value based on MBS QFI SN provided by this application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by this application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by this application.
  • FIG 11 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by this application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic flow chart of yet another communication method provided by this application.
  • Figure 13a is a schematic diagram of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 13b is a schematic diagram 2 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 13c is a schematic diagram 3 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 13d is a schematic diagram 4 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic diagram 5 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 15a is a schematic diagram 6 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 15b is a schematic diagram 7 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 16a is a schematic diagram 8 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 16b is a schematic diagram 9 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 17a is a schematic diagram 10 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 17b is a schematic diagram 11 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided by this application.
  • Figure 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a core network device provided by this application.
  • A/B can mean A or B; "and/or” in this application only means It is an association relationship that describes associated objects. It means that there can be three relationships.
  • a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. Among them, A and B Can be singular or plural.
  • plural means two or more than two.
  • At least one of the following” or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items).
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
  • words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish identical or similar items with basically the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described as “exemplary” or “such as” in the embodiments of the present application is not to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as “exemplary” or “such as” is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner that is easier to understand.
  • an embodiment means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic associated with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, various embodiments are not necessarily referred to the same embodiment throughout this specification. Furthermore, the particular features, structures or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It can be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of each process does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be determined by the execution order of the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes no limitation.
  • the technical solution provided by this application can be used in various communication systems.
  • the communication system can be a third generation partnership project (3GPP) communication system, for example, the fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) long-term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) new radio (NR) system, vehicle to everything (V2X) system, LTE and NR hybrid networking system, or device-to-device (device-to-device, D2D) system, machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M) communication system, Internet of Things (IoT), and other next-generation communication systems, etc.
  • 3GPP third generation partnership project
  • 4G fourth generation, 4G) long-term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system
  • 5th generation, 5G) new radio (NR) system vehicle to everything (V2X) system
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • LTE and NR hybrid networking system or device-to-device (device-to-device, D2D) system, machine to machine (mach
  • the above-mentioned communication systems applicable to the present application are only examples.
  • the communication systems applicable to the present application are not limited to these and will be explained uniformly here, and will not be described in detail below.
  • the communication system includes a core network device 201 and at least one access network device 202. Further, at least one terminal device 203 may also be included.
  • each of the multiple access network devices 202 can receive MBS service data packets through the core network device 203.
  • the core network device 201 is mainly used for packet routing and forwarding of data packets, data packet inspection, implementation of some policy rules on the user plane, QoS processing on the user plane, etc.
  • the core network device 201 may be a user plane function (UPF) network element or a multicast/broadcast user plane function (MB-UPF) network. Yuan.
  • UPF user plane function
  • MB-UPF multicast/broadcast user plane function
  • the access network device 202 is a device that connects terminal devices to a wireless network, and may be an evolutionary base station (evolutional Node B) in LTE or an evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A).
  • eNB or eNodeB such as traditional macro base station eNB and micro base station eNB in heterogeneous network scenarios; or it can be the next generation node B (next generation node B, gNodeB or gNB) in the 5G system; or it can be a transmission receiving point (transmission reception point, TRP); or it can be a base station in the future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN); or it can be a broadband network service gateway (broadband network gateway, BNG), aggregation switch or non-3GPP Access device; or it can be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN); or it can be an access point (AP) in a WiFi system; or it can be a wireless relay node Or a wireless
  • the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include various forms of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application. .
  • the access network device 202 may refer to a centralized unit (central unit, CU), or the access network device may be composed of a CU and a distributed unit (DU).
  • CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • a CU may be composed of a CU control plane (CU control plane, CU-CP) and a CU user plane (CU user plane, CU-UP).
  • CU control plane CU control plane, CU-CP
  • CU user plane CU-UP
  • the terminal device 203 may refer to a device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • Terminal equipment can also be called user equipment (UE), terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station (MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile terminal (MT) , user terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device, etc.
  • the terminal may be, for example, a wireless terminal in an IoT, V2X, D2D, M2M, 5G network, or a future evolved PLMN.
  • the terminal device 203 can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons, satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal device 203 may be a drone, an IoT device (for example, a sensor, an electric meter, a water meter, etc.), a V2X device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), or a cellular phone.
  • IoT device for example, a sensor, an electric meter, a water meter, etc.
  • V2X device for example, a V2X device
  • ST station
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • cellular phone for example, a cellular phone.
  • cordless phones cordless phones
  • session initiation protocol (SIP) phones wireless local loop (WLL) stations
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities
  • computing Equipment or other processing equipment connected to a wireless modem vehicle-mounted equipment
  • wearable devices also known as wearable smart devices
  • tablets or computers with wireless transceiver functions virtual reality (VR) terminals
  • industrial controls Wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, and transportation safety Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, vehicle-mounted terminals, vehicles with vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication capabilities, intelligent network connections Vehicles, drones with UAV to UAV (U2U) communication capabilities, etc.
  • the terminal may be mobile or fixed, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the terminal equipment, access network equipment, or core network equipment shown in Figure 2 can adopt the composition structure shown in Figure 3, or include the components shown in Figure 3.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 300 provided by this application.
  • the communication device 300 can be a terminal device or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal device; or it can be an access network device or a module in the access network device. Or a chip or a system on a chip; or, it can be a core network device or a module or a chip or a system on a chip in the core network device.
  • the communication device 300 includes at least one processor 301 and at least one communication interface (FIG. 3 is only an example of including a communication interface 304 and a processor 301 for illustration).
  • the communication device 300 may also include a communication bus 302 and a memory 303.
  • the processor 301 may be a general central processing unit (CPU), general processor, network processor (NP), digital signal processing (DSP), microprocessor processor, microcontroller, programmable logic device (PLD) or any combination thereof.
  • the processor 301 can also be other devices with processing functions, such as circuits, devices or software modules, without limitation.
  • the communication bus 302 is used to connect different components in the communication device 300 so that different components can communicate.
  • the communication bus 302 may be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 3, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • Communication interface 304 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks.
  • the communication interface 304 may be a module, a circuit, a transceiver, or any device capable of realizing communication.
  • the communication interface 304 may also be an input and output interface located within the processor 301 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
  • Memory 303 may be a device with a storage function, used to store instructions and/or data. Wherein, the instructions may be computer programs.
  • the memory 303 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or may be a random access memory (RAM). or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and/or instructions, and can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, etc., are not restricted.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, etc. are not restricted.
  • the memory 303 may exist independently of the processor 301 or may be integrated with the processor 301 .
  • the memory 303 may be located inside the communication device 300 or outside the communication device 300, without limitation.
  • the processor 301 can be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 303 to implement the methods provided by the following embodiments of the application.
  • the communication device 300 may also include an output device 305 and an input device 306.
  • Output device 305 communicates with processor 301 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 305 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector), etc.
  • Input device 306 communicates with processor 301 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 306 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensing device, or the like.
  • access network equipment, core network equipment, or terminal equipment may include more or less components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, or some components may be separated, or Different component arrangements.
  • the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • MBS multicast and broadcast service
  • MBS is a service for multiple terminal devices.
  • Common MBS include live broadcast services, public safety services, batch software update services, etc.
  • the transmission path of MBS can be: data server (or MBS server) ⁇ core network equipment ⁇ access network equipment ⁇ multiple terminal devices.
  • the service data is transmitted through an MBS session, and the MBS session includes at least one MBS quality of service (QoS) flow.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the access network device sends the MBS service to the terminal device
  • the service data is transmitted through the MBS radio bear (MBS radio bear, MRB).
  • MBS radio bear MRB
  • One MRB can be associated with one or more QoS flows.
  • PTM point-to-multipoint
  • PTP point-to-point
  • the protocol stack on the wireless access network side can be divided into a user plane protocol stack and a control plane protocol stack.
  • the user plane protocol stack can include a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a media interface layer. Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical (physical, PHY) layer, etc.
  • the physical layer belongs to the first layer (also called layer 1 (L1)), and the MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer, and SDAP layer belong to the second layer (also called layer 2 (L2) ).
  • the radio resource control (RRC) layer of the control plane belongs to the third layer (also called layer 3 (L3)).
  • the SDAP layer is located above the PDCP layer
  • the PDCP layer is located above the RLC layer
  • the RLC layer is located above the MAC layer
  • the MAC layer is located above the physical layer.
  • each protocol layer processes the data packets in sequence from top to bottom as shown in Figure 5, and finally transmits them to the terminal device through the air interface.
  • the terminal device After receiving the data packet at the air interface, the terminal device processes the data packet accordingly in the reverse order of the access network device.
  • the processing of data packets by each protocol layer is implemented by the multi-functional entity corresponding to the protocol layer.
  • the processing of the PDCP layer is implemented by the corresponding PDCP layer entity.
  • the service provided by Layer 2 to transmit user data between terminal equipment and access network equipment can be called a radio bearer (RB).
  • RB radio bearer
  • MRB the service provided by Layer 2 to transmit user data between terminal equipment and access network equipment
  • the service of transmitting user data between the terminal device and the access network device can be implemented by each protocol layer belonging to layer 2 mentioned above.
  • the user plane protocol stack shown in Figure 5 does not constitute any limitation on the solution of this application. In actual applications, the user plane protocol stack may include more or fewer protocol layers than shown.
  • the PDCP layer is mainly used to process RRC messages on the control plane and Internet Protocol (IP) packets on the user plane. Mainly implements the following functions:
  • Security functions such as data encryption/decryption, integrity protection/verification
  • the protocol data unit (packet data unit, PDU) of the PDCP layer is composed of the service data unit (SDU) of the PDCP layer and the PDCP header.
  • the PDU at the PDCP layer is divided into data PDU (Data PDU) and control PDU (Control PDU).
  • Data PDU can include user plane data and control plane data;
  • control PDU can include PDCP status report and robust header compression (ROHC) feedback.
  • ROHC robust header compression
  • PDCP Data PDU (or SDU) is identified by the COUNT value, which consists of the high-order super frame number (HFN) and the low-order PDCP sequence number (SN).
  • the PDCP PDU sent by the sender to the receiver includes PDCP SN.
  • the receiving side can calculate the HFN based on the PDCP SN to determine the COUNT value of the PDCP PDU.
  • the length of the COUNT value is usually 32 bits.
  • the length of PDCP SN is 12 bits or 18 bits.
  • the length of the HFN is 32-PDCP SN size.
  • a PDCP PDU format is shown.
  • the R field represents a reserved field and can be set to 0.
  • the PDCP SN field is used to carry PDCP SN, cont. means continue, and the data field is used to carry data with variable length.
  • the message authentication code for integrity (MAC-I) field is used to carry the digital signature generated by integrity protection.
  • the COUNT value is generated by the access network device.
  • the access network equipment can be Each MRB in the MRB maintains a COUNT value separately.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet of MRB#1 can range from 0 to 2 32 -1, and the COUNT value of the data packet of MRB#2 has the same range. It is 0 ⁇ 2 32 -1.
  • COUNT value in this application can also be called (or described as) “COUNT”, and the two can be replaced with each other.
  • the sending PDCP entity maintains the state variable TX_NEXT. This state variable indicates the COUNT value of the next transmitted PDCP SDU. The initial value is 0.
  • the receiving PDCP entity maintains the following state variables:
  • RX_NEXT This status variable indicates the COUNT value of the next PDCP SDU expected to be received. The initial value is 0.
  • RX_DELIV This status variable indicates the COUNT value of the first (first) PDCP SDU that has not been submitted to the upper layer but is waiting to be submitted. The initial value is 0.
  • RX_RECORD This status variable indicates that the COUNT value of the PDCP Data PDU that triggers the reordering (t-reordering) timer (timer) is increased by 1.
  • the receiving PDCP entity After receiving the PDCP PDU, the receiving PDCP entity first determines the HFN and COUNT values of the PDCP PDU based on the PDCP SN in the PDCP PDU header and the current state variable. Subsequent decryption and integrity verification can be performed based on the COUNT value, and the status variable can be updated.
  • the receiving PDCP entity can determine the HFN of the PDCP PDU according to the following method:
  • RCVD_SN SN(RX_DELIV)-Window_Size:
  • RCVD_HFN HFN(RX_DELIV)+1.
  • RCVD_SN is greater than or equal to SN(RX_DELIV)-Window_Size, and less than SN(RX_DELIV)+Window_Size):
  • RCVD_HFN HFN(RX_DELIV);
  • RCVD_COUNT [RCVD_HFN, RCVD_SN].
  • RCVD_COUNT represents the COUNT value
  • RCVD_HFN in [RCVD_HFN, RCVD_SN] represents the HFN of the COUNT value
  • RCVD_SN represents the PDCP SN of the COUNT value.
  • the COUNT value in this application can be expressed in the form of [HFN, PDCP SN].
  • [X 1 , X 2 ] indicates that the HFN of the COUNT value is equal to X 1 and the PDCP SN is equal to X 2 .
  • HFN (state variable): represents the HFN part of the state variable
  • SN (state variable): represents the SN part of the state variable
  • RCVD_SN Indicates the PDCP SN of the received PDCP Data PDU, included in the PDU header;
  • RCVD_HFN Indicates the HFN of the received PDCP Data PDU calculated by the receiving PDCP entity
  • Window_Size Indicates the (reordering) window size, its value is 2 PDCP-SN-Size-1 ;
  • RX_DELIV is a status variable. SN(RX_DELIV) represents the SN part of RX_DELIV, and HFN(RX_DELIV) represents the HFN part of RX_DELIV.
  • the following situation may occur: after a certain access network device sends the MBS service for a period of time, a terminal device accesses the access network device to receive the MBS service. At this time, the HFN on the access network device side may not be 0. If the terminal equipment still follows the unicast technology and sets the initial value of HFN to 0, it will cause the HFN of the access network equipment and the terminal equipment to be misaligned, or the HFN will be out of sync (or out of synchronization).
  • the access network device sends the reference HFN and PDCP SN to the terminal device so that the terminal device can calculate the HFN of the first MBS data packet received by the terminal device, thereby aligning the HFN between the access network device and the terminal device;
  • the initial value of PDCP SN of RX_NEXT is set to (x+1)mod2 PDCP-SN-Size ;
  • the initial value of PDCP SN of RX_DELIV is set to (x-0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 ) mod 2 PDCP-SN-Size .
  • x represents the value of PDCP SN of the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device.
  • the initial COUNT value of RX_DELIV can be obtained from the COUNT value of the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device and the (reordered) window size (i.e. Window_Size). For example, from the initial COUNT value of RX_DELIV to the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device
  • the COUNT value of PDCP PDU includes a total of 0.5*Window_Size COUNT values.
  • the COUNT value of the first MBS data packet received by the terminal device is small (less than 0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 )
  • the HFN part of the initial value of RX_DELIV will be negative. , such as -1.
  • the length of the PDCP SN is 12 bits
  • the access network device adds 1 to the initial HFN of the PDCP PDU to obtain the final HFN of the PDCP PDU.
  • the HFN of all PDCP PDUs of the MBS service is equal to the initial HFN plus 1.
  • the initial HFN of the PDCP PDU may be generated based on the MBS quality of service flow identifier (QoS flow identifier, QFI) SN (ie, MBS QFI SN).
  • MBS services there may be multiple access network devices transmitting data for the same MBS service.
  • different access network devices need to generate the same COUNT value for the same data packet.
  • different access network devices can generate the COUNT value of the data packet based on the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is generated by the core network equipment.
  • the core network device maintains the MBS QFI SN for each QoS flow in the multiple QoS flows.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of QoS flow 1 can range from 0 to 2 MBS-QFI-SN-Size -1
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of QoS flow 2 can also range from 0 to 2 MBS-QFI-SN-Size -1. 0 ⁇ 2MBS -QFI-SN-Size -1.
  • MBS-QFI-SN-Size represents the length of the MBS QFI SN.
  • the length can be the same as the length of the COUNT value, for example, 32 bits, so that the access network device can refer to the MBS QFI SN to generate the COUNT value.
  • the access network device can generate the COUNT value as follows:
  • the access network device can intercept the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN as the HFN of the COUNT value, and the NK low-order bits as the PDCP SN of the COUNT value.
  • K is the length of HFN
  • N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
  • the access network equipment can set the COUNT value equal to the MBS QFI SN.
  • the access network equipment can Based on the K high-order bits of QFI SN, a certain constant is added as the HFN of the COUNT value. where the constant is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the access network device can generate a COUNT value based on the MBS QFI SN of all QoS flows corresponding to the MRB.
  • the QoS flows with QFI equal to 1 and QFI equal to 2 are associated with MRB#1, and the QoS flows with QFI equal to 3 are associated with MRB#2.
  • the data packets sent by the core network equipment include: QFI SN equals 19 and 20 in the QoS flow with QFI equal to 1, QFI SN equals 48, 49, 50, 51, and QFI SN in the QoS flow with QFI equal to 2. 52 data packets, and QFI SN equals 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104 data packets in the QoS flow with QFI equal to 3.
  • the access network device can use the QFI SN of the data packet as the COUNT value.
  • the access network device can regard the sum of the QFI SNs of the next expected received data packets of the two QoS flows as the next received The COUNT value of the packet. For example, at time A, the QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received by QFI 1 is 20, and the QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received by QFI 2 is 50, then the first received data packet after time A The packet's COUNT value is equal to 70.
  • the network device can use the sum of the maximum QFI SNs of the two QoS flows that have been received as the COUNT value of the next received data packet. For example, at time A, the maximum QFI SN of QFI 1 received is 19, and the maximum QFI SN of QFI 2 received is 49, then the COUNT value of the first received data packet after time A is equal to 68.
  • MBS QFI SN is briefly described as QFSN in Figure 8.
  • the access network equipment does not add a certain constant as HFN on the basis of the K high-order bits of MBS QFI SN as an example. In practical applications, it can also be added to the K high-order bits of MBS QFI SN. Add a certain constant to obtain the final HFN.
  • the QFI SN in this application refers to MBS QFI SN, which can be replaced by MBS QFI SN.
  • this application provides a communication method that can effectively prevent the COUNT value in the access network device from overflowing for the MBS service, thereby improving communication reliability.
  • the solution of this application can be used to solve the situation where the COUNT value has reached the upper limit due to any reason, but the QFI SN has not yet reached the upper limit.
  • the execution subject can perform some or all of the steps in the embodiment of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples. The embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, various steps may be performed in a different order than those presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the names of the messages between the devices or the names of the parameters in the messages are just examples, and other names may also be used in specific implementations. This is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application. .
  • the methods provided in the following embodiments of this application can be applied in the transmission scenario of MBS services.
  • this is only an exemplary description of the application scenarios of the present application, and this application scenario does not impose any limitations on the present application. Please do not limit the application scenarios of the methods provided below.
  • a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application includes the following steps:
  • the core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first packet is less than the first threshold.
  • the first QoS flow is associated with the first MRB.
  • the first QoS flow may be one QoS flow, or may include multiple QoS flows.
  • the first QoS flow is one QoS flow
  • the first MRB and the QoS flow have a one-to-one relationship
  • the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows
  • the first MRB and the QoS flow have a one-to-many relationship.
  • the first data packet may be a data packet of any one of the multiple QoS flows.
  • the access network device may send the first data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB.
  • the payload of the first data packet received by the access network device and the first data packet sent to the terminal device are the same, but the structures or data packet headers of the two may be different.
  • the first data packet received by the access network device is a data packet encapsulated using the GPRS tunneling protocol for the user plane (GTP-U)
  • the first data packet sent by the access network device to the terminal device is
  • the data packet is a data packet encapsulated using the air interface protocol.
  • GPRS refers to the general packet radio system (GPRS).
  • the data packet when the MBS QFI SN attribute of the data packet appears, the data packet usually refers to the data packet received by the access network device.
  • the COUNT value attribute of the data packet when the COUNT value attribute of the data packet appears, the data packet usually refers to the data packet sent by the access network device to the terminal device. sent packet.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet can also be understood as the COUNT value of the PDCP PDU (or SDU) of the data packet.
  • the access network device can determine the COUNT value of the first data packet based on the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the access network equipment can add an offset value to the HFN deduced based on MBS QFI SN to obtain the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet, and deduced based on MBS QFI SN Get the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first packet.
  • the offset value is a positive integer.
  • the COUNT value of the data packets subsequent to the first data packet is generated in the same manner as the COUNT value of the first data packet.
  • the offset value in this application can be predefined by the protocol; or it can be negotiated between access network devices; or it can be configured by the core network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first threshold may be 2 N -1, where N is the length of the MBS QFI SN.
  • the length of a parameter refers to the number of bits of the parameter.
  • the length of a parameter can also be called the size of the parameter.
  • the length of MBS QFI SN can also be called the size of MBS QFI SN. The two are interchangeable.
  • the first threshold may be greater than or equal to the corresponding MBS when the COUNT value is equal to 2 N -1 QFI SN increases by 1 and is less than or equal to 2 N -1.
  • the access network device sends the first instruction information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the first indication information from the access network device.
  • the first indication information is used by the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow to be greater than or equal to 0 and smaller than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  • the access network device includes a CU, and when the CU includes a CU-UP and a CU-CP, the CU-UP may notify the CU-CP to send the first indication information, and then the CU-CP may send the first indication information to the core network device.
  • the CU-UP may notify the CU-CP to send the first indication information
  • the CU-CP may send the first indication information to the core network device.
  • the content of the information sent by the CU-UP to the CU-CP and the content of the first instruction information sent by the CU-CP to the core network device may be the same or different.
  • the information sent by the CU-UP to the CU-CP is used to notify the CU-CP to send the first indication information.
  • the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device when any of the following conditions occurs, or in other words, the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device when any of the following conditions are met. Send the first instruction information to the core network device:
  • the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB can be understood as: the maximum value of the COUNT values that the access network device has actually used/allocated/occupied/sent for the first MRB, rather than the maximum value that can theoretically be The maximum value of COUNT reached.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet is the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB.
  • the access network device can add the value of the K high-order bits of a and the value of the K high-order bits of b and then add the offset value to obtain the COUNT value of the first data packet.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet obtained through this calculation is the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB.
  • the length of the COUN value is equal to N and the length of HFN is equal to K
  • the length of the PDCP SN is equal to N-K.
  • the length of PDCP SN can also be expressed by PDCP-SN-Size.
  • the length of HFN can also be expressed as N-[PDCP-SN-Size]. That is to say, in this application, N-K can be replaced by PDCP-SN-Size, and K can be replaced by N-[PDCP-SN-Size].
  • the second threshold may be less than or equal to 2 N -1, where N is the length of COUNT.
  • N is the length of COUNT.
  • the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer.
  • the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, which can also be understood as: the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is close to the second threshold.
  • the access network device can calculate the COUNT value of the first data packet.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet is the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB.
  • the first MRB will be deactivated or will be released.
  • the reason why the first MRB is deactivated or released may be that the above situation 1) or situation 2) occurs, or the following situation 4) or situation 5) occurs.
  • the reason why the first MRB is deactivated or released may be that the above situation 1) or situation 2) occurs, or the following situation 4) or situation 5) occurs.
  • the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
  • the third threshold may be the MBS QFI SN such that the COUNT value is equal to the second threshold, for example, when the second threshold is 2 N -1
  • the third threshold is less than or equal to 2 N -X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] -1.
  • X represents the offset value.
  • the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow can be understood as: for the first QoS flow, the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN actually used by the core network equipment, rather than the theoretically achievable MBS QFI SN. Maximum value (e.g. 2 N -1).
  • the access network device can use the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet as the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow.
  • M2 is a positive integer.
  • M2 and M1 are equal.
  • the description of the third threshold and the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow may refer to the relevant description in case 4) above.
  • the access network device can send the first indication information.
  • the descriptions of situations 1)-5) above should not be used as strict restrictions.
  • situation 1) when the access network device determines that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB minus the second threshold is equal to 0, it also The first instruction information can be sent.
  • the core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is smaller than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. Further, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0.
  • the core network device sets the second data packet of the first QoS flow, which can also be understood as: the core network device wraps around or resets or initializes the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow.
  • the second data packet may include data packets of some of the multiple QoS flows, or the second data packet may include data packets of some of the multiple QoS flows. packets for all QoS flows.
  • the core network device can set the MBS QFI SN of some of the multiple QoS flows to be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI of the first data packet.
  • the value of SN may be set to a value greater than or equal to 0 and less than the value of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the second The data packet may be a data packet of QFI#A, or the second data packet may be a data packet of QFI#B, or the second data packet may include a data packet of QFI#A and a data packet of QFI#B.
  • the core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. It can be understood that the core network device sets the second data of the first QoS flow based on the trigger of the first indication information.
  • the core network device can send the second data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device can determine the COUNT value of the second data packet and send the second data packet to the terminal device, and include the COUNT value in the second data packet sent to the terminal device. PDCP SN.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packets sent after the first data packet will increase sequentially based on the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the packets up to the first QoS flow is equal to 2 N -1.
  • the access network equipment sends the first instruction letter to the core network equipment. information, so that when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold, the core network device can set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet to be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI of the first data packet based on the first indication information. SN.
  • the core network device can reset the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow does not reach the first threshold, effectively reducing the problem caused by excessive MBS QFI SN.
  • the COUNT value overflows, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving communication reliability.
  • the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet, which may include: the second data packet is the M3th data packet after the first data packet, and M3 is a positive integer. .
  • M3 is less than or equal to M1+1, and M1 is the maximum difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold; from the core network equipment From the perspective of M3 is less than or equal to M2+1, M2 is the maximum difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  • the second data packet is the first data packet after the first data packet.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet, it does not send the data packet to the access network device before receiving the first indication information; or, it can be considered that after the core network device sends the first data packet, it receives Before the first indication information is received, at least one data packet is sent to the access network device, but the access network device discards this part of the data packet, and the core network device resends the at least one data packet after receiving the first indication information based on the implementation. Bag.
  • the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device when the above situation 1) or 4) occurs.
  • the access network device determines the COUNT value of the first data packet. is equal to 1000, then the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device. After receiving the first indication information, the core network device sends a second data packet to the access network device, and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet may be equal to 0.
  • M3 is greater than 1 and less than or equal to M1 (or M2)
  • M1 M2
  • the core network device also sends the at least one third data packet to the access network device, and after the at least one third data packet, sends the third data packet to the access network device.
  • Two data packets it can be considered that the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device when the above situation 2) or situation 5) occurs.
  • the third data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the third data packet is greater than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the last third data packet is less than or equal to the third threshold, or the COUNT value of the last third data packet Less than or equal to the second threshold.
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple third data packets is less than or equal to the third threshold.
  • the access network device determines the first data
  • the COUNT value of the packet is equal to 990, and the difference between it and the second threshold is equal to 10, that is, the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the first MRB and the second threshold is equal to M1.
  • the access network device can send a request to the core network device. Send the first instruction message.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet but before receiving the first instruction information
  • the data packet is not sent to the access network device.
  • the core network device may send a data packet to the access network device. 10 third packets.
  • the second data packet is the 11th data packet after the first data packet.
  • the number of third data packets sent by the core network device may also be less than 10. For example, 8 third data packets are sent.
  • the second data packet is the ninth data packet after the first data packet.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet but before receiving the first instruction information, it also sends the data packet to the access network device. After receiving the first instruction information, the core network device may send the data packet to the access network device. Send (10-M4) third data packets.
  • M4 is the number of data packets sent by the core network device to the access network device after sending the first data packet and before receiving the first indication information.
  • the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device when the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to 990. Due to the transmission delay, the core network device sends two more data packets after the first data packet.
  • the second data packet is the first data The 8th data packet after the packet.
  • the number of third data packets sent by the core network device can also be less than (10-M4). For example, 4 third data packets are sent.
  • the second data packet is the fifth data after the first data packet. Bag.
  • the access network device when it sends the first indication information to the core network device, it can also indicate the first data packet to the core network device, for example, send the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet to the core network device so that the core network device The network device determines the above M4.
  • the access network device may not indicate the first data packet to the core network device.
  • the core network device may send as few third data packets as possible before the second data packet.
  • the access network device when the maximum COUNT value of the first MRB is close to the second threshold, or when the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is close to the third threshold, the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device.
  • a long time is reserved for the transmission of the first indication information, so that the core network equipment can receive the first indication information before the COUNT value overflows, and set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet according to the first indication information, effectively reducing the MBS QFI
  • the COUNT value overflow caused by excessive SN reduces packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improves communication reliability.
  • the content included in the first indication information may be implemented in the following two possible ways:
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following a)-g):
  • the first indication information may include bit A.
  • bit A When the value of bit A is 1 or 0, it may indicate that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold.
  • the first indication information may include bit B.
  • bit B When the value of bit B is 1 or 0, it may indicate that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1.
  • M1 can be defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the access network device.
  • the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold or M1. Among them, the difference is less than or equal to M1.
  • the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold.
  • the first indication information may include field C, and a value of field C corresponds to a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold.
  • the field C may indicate the number of remaining HFNs that can be used before the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold, or the number of remaining PDCP SNs that can be used.
  • the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is L*2 PDCP-SN-Size , and L is the remaining HFNs that can be used. number.
  • the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the number of remaining usable PDCP SNs.
  • the status information of the first MRB may include: the first MRB (will be) deactivated, or the first MRB (will be) released, or the first MRB will no longer be used, or the first MRB cannot be used. continue to use.
  • the first indication information may include bit D.
  • bit D When the value of bit D is 1 or 0, it may be indicated that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
  • the first indication information may include bit E.
  • bit E When the value of bit E is 1 or 0, it may indicate that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2 .
  • the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold. Among them, the difference is less than or equal to M2.
  • the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  • the first indication information may include field F, and a value of field F corresponds to a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  • the first indication information may also include identification information, and the identification information includes at least one of the following: an identification of the first MRB, an identification of the first QoS flow, or an identification of the MBS service.
  • the identification information is used to indicate to the core network device that the first indication information is indication information about the first MRB, the first QoS flow, or the above-mentioned MBS service.
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following: an identity of the first MRB, an identity of the first QoS flow, or an identity of the MBS service.
  • at least one of the identity of the first MRB, the identity of the first QoS flow, or the identity of the MBS service may indicate at least one of the above information a)-g).
  • the first indication information when the first indication information includes the identification of the first MRB, it may indicate the information related to the first MRB in the above a)-g). For example, it may indicate that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold, or it may indicate that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, or it may indicate that the first MRB status information.
  • the first indication information includes the identifier of the first QoS flow (or includes the identifier of the first QoS flow and the identifier of the MBS service), it may indicate the information related to the first QoS flow in the above a)-g). For example, it may be indicated that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold, or it may be indicated that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2.
  • the first indication information includes the identification of the first MRB
  • the information related to the first QoS flow in a)-g) may also be indicated.
  • the first indication information includes the identifier of the first QoS flow (or includes the identifier of the first QoS flow and the identifier of the MBS service)
  • the information related to the first MRB in a)-g) may also be indicated.
  • the first indication information can be carried in an existing information element (IE) or in a newly defined IE, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • IE information element
  • the access network device may release the first MRB and establish the second MRB.
  • the second data packet is carried on the second MRB.
  • the related configuration of the second MRB and the related configuration of the first MRB may be the same or different, and this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the establishment of the second MRB may be performed after the release of the first MRB is completed. Alternatively, it can be executed before releasing the first MRB.
  • the access network device may establish the second MRB before sending the first data to the terminal device through the first MRB, which is not specifically limited in this application. If the access network device establishes the second MRB before releasing the first MRB, Then, after receiving the second data packet, the access network device can promptly send the second data packet to the terminal device, thereby reducing service delay.
  • the access network device may release the first MRB after sending the first data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB.
  • the access network device may release the first MRB after receiving the second data packet.
  • the access network device if the access network device establishes the second MRB after releasing the first MRB, the access network device needs to cache the second data packet, and after the second MRB is established, send the second MRB to the terminal device through the second MRB. Two data packets.
  • the access network device may release the first MRB after sending the first data packet and the third data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB.
  • the first MRB is released.
  • the access network device releasing the first MRB may include: sending a first signaling to the terminal device, the first signaling being used to release the first MRB.
  • the access network device may send the first signaling to the terminal device based on the status indication information reported by the terminal device. That is to say, after receiving the status indication information from the terminal device, the access network device sends the first signaling to the terminal device.
  • the status indication information may be used to indicate the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device.
  • the access network device can determine whether the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device is equal to the second threshold. If equal, the first signaling is sent to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may configure a second threshold to the terminal device in advance, so that when the maximum COUNT value of the successfully received data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold, the terminal device sends a request to the access network device.
  • the network device sends this status indication information.
  • the second threshold and M1 may be configured in advance for the terminal device, so that when the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the successfully received data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, the terminal device will access the terminal device.
  • the network device sends this status indication information. At this time, after receiving the status indication information, the access network device may not perform judgment and immediately send the first signaling to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may send the status indication information to the access network device after successfully receiving the first data packet.
  • the status indication information is used to indicate the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device, and the data packet whose COUNT value is smaller than the maximum COUNT value has been submitted to the upper layer.
  • the upper layer refers to the protocol layer that processes data packets after the PDCP layer, such as the SDAP layer or application layer.
  • the access network device can determine whether the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device is equal to the second threshold. If equal, the first signaling is sent to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may pre-configure the second threshold, or pre-configure the second threshold and M1. Reference may be made to the above related description, which will not be described again here.
  • the status indication information is used to indicate the COUNT value of the first PDCP SDU that has not been submitted to the upper layer but is waiting to be submitted, that is, it is used to indicate RX_DELIV.
  • the access network device can determine whether RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the second threshold, and if RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the second threshold, send the first message to the terminal device. signaling.
  • the access network device may configure the second threshold to the terminal device in advance, so that the terminal device sends the status indication information to the access network device when RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the second threshold. At this time, the access network After receiving the status indication information, the device may immediately send the first signaling to the terminal device without performing judgment.
  • the access network device releases the first MRB based on the status information reported by the terminal device, which can avoid data loss caused by releasing the first MRB when the terminal device uses the first MRB, and improves the reliability of communication.
  • the access network device establishing the second MRB may include: sending second signaling to the terminal device, the second signaling being used to establish the second MRB.
  • the access network device when the access network device establishes the second MRB after releasing the first MRB, the first signaling and the second signaling may be carried in the same message, or the first signaling and the second signaling may be carried In the two messages, this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the access network device may perform the above step 902 when the status of the MBS service is deactivated. Because in the deactivated state, the core network equipment does not send MBS service data, and the RRC connection of the terminal equipment may be released. When releasing the RRC connection, the MRB needs to be released. At this time, the first MRB can be released without the access network device sending the first signaling, thereby saving signaling overhead. Subsequently, when the status of the MBS service changes from the deactivated state to the activated state, the access network device needs to re-establish an RRC connection with the terminal device. During the process of re-establishing the RRC connection, a new MRB needs to be created. Therefore, when the access network device does not send the second signaling, the second MRB can also be created, which also saves signaling overhead.
  • the core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the QoS flow before the MBS QFI SN of the QoS flow reaches the first threshold, thereby reducing the MBS QFI SN process.
  • the COUNT value overflows due to a large value.
  • this application also provides a communication method in which the core network device can limit the MBS QFI SN from being too large by releasing the MBS session or deleting the QoS flow, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large.
  • the communication method includes the following steps:
  • the access network device generates second indication information.
  • the core network device may send the first data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold.
  • the first QoS flow is associated with the first MRB.
  • the first QoS flow is the QoS flow in the first MBS session of the MBS service.
  • the access network device may generate the second indication information when any of the following conditions occurs, or in other words, the access network device may generate the second indication when any of the following conditions are met. information:
  • the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer.
  • the first MRB will be deactivated or will be released.
  • the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
  • M2 is a positive integer.
  • M2 and M1 are equal.
  • the access network device when the access network device generates the second indication information when any of the above situations 1)-5) occurs:
  • the second indication information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the MBS. Further, the second indication information can also be used by the core network device to establish a second MBS session of the MBS service.
  • the second indication information is used by the core network device to delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session. Further, the second indication information can also be used by the core network device to add the second QoS in the first MBS session. flow.
  • the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the MBS and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service.
  • the second indication information is used by the core network device to delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the access network device sends the second instruction information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the second indication information from the access network device.
  • the core network device may perform the following step S1003a, or perform the following step S1003b.
  • step S1003a when the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the MBS and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service, the following step S1003a is performed.
  • step S1003b is performed when the second instruction information is used for the core network device to delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the core network device releases the first MBS session of the MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establishes the second MBS session of the MBS service.
  • step S1003a it can be considered that the core network device releases the first MBS session based on the trigger of the second indication information and establishes the second MBS session.
  • the session identifier, temporary multicast group identifier (TMGI), etc. of the first MBS session and the second MBS session may be the same or different, and this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the core network device can release the first MBS session with the terminal device as the granularity, and correspondingly, establish the second MBS session with the terminal device as the granularity.
  • the core network device may delete the first MBS session with the MBS service as the granularity, and correspondingly, establish the second MBS session with the MBS service as the granularity.
  • the core network device releasing the first MBS session of the MBS service may include: the core network device sending third signaling to the access network device, the third signaling being used to release the first MBS session.
  • the core network device establishing the second MBS session may include: the core network device sending fourth signaling to the access network device, where the fourth signaling is used to establish the second MBS session.
  • the core network device deletes the first QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second instruction information, and adds the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • step S1003 it can be considered that the core network device deletes the first QoS flow of the first MBS session based on the triggering of the second indication information, and adds the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the QFIs of the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow may be the same or different, and this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the second QoS flow is used to transmit data planned to be transmitted using the first QoS flow. That is, the second QoS flow can be understood as a substitute QoS flow for the first QoS flow, realizing the functions that should be realized by the first QoS flow.
  • the core network device deleting the first QoS flow of the first MBS session may include: the core network device sending a fifth signaling to the access network device, the fifth signaling being used to delete the first QoS flow.
  • the core network device adding the second QoS flow to the first MBS session may include: the core network device sending sixth signaling to the access network device, the sixth signaling being used to add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. .
  • the fifth signaling and the sixth signaling may be carried in the same message, or may be carried in two messages, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the message carrying the fifth signaling and/or the sixth signaling may be a service update request message.
  • the service update request message may be based on the MBS session as the granularity or the terminal device as the granularity.
  • the access network device can release Place the first MRB and build the second MRB.
  • the second MRB may be associated with the QoS flow in the second MBS session, or may be associated with the second QoS flow added in the first MBS session.
  • the core network device can release the first MBS session of the MBS service based on the second instruction information of the access network device, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Because when the first MBS session is released, the QoS flow of the first MBS session is deleted. After the second MBS session is created, the QoS flow in the second MBS session is also newly created. Therefore, the core network device subsequently passes the third MBS session.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, and the corresponding COUNT value of the data packet is smaller.
  • the access network device can send the second indication information according to the actual situation, for example, when the COUNT value is about to overflow, so that the MBS QFI SN of subsequent data packets is smaller, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large. This reduces packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improves communication reliability.
  • the core network device may delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session based on the second indication information of the access network device, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. Since the second QoS flow is newly added, when the core network equipment subsequently transmits the MBS service data packet through the second QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, thereby reducing the MBS QFI SN from being too large. The resulting COUNT value overflows and improves communication reliability.
  • the content included in the second indication information may be implemented in the following two possible ways:
  • the second indication information may include at least one of the following a)-g):
  • the second indication information may also include identification information, and the identification information includes at least one of the following: an identification of the first MRB, an identification of the first QoS flow, or an identification of the MBS service.
  • the identification information is used to indicate to the core network device that the second indication information is indication information about the first MRB, the first QoS flow, or the above-mentioned MBS service.
  • the second indication information may include at least one of the following: an identity of the first MRB, an identity of the first QoS flow, or an identity of the MBS service.
  • at least one of the identity of the first MRB, the identity of the first QoS flow, or the identity of the MBS service may indicate at least one of the above information a)-g).
  • the core network device can learn that the reason for releasing the first MBS session or deleting the first QoS flow of the first MBS session is: MRB (will) be stopped from use, MRB (will be) One or more of the items will be released or the MRB will be reset. Therefore, in the above third signaling, the core network device may indicate the reason for releasing the first MBS session, or in the above fifth signaling, the core network device may indicate the reason for deleting the first QoS flow.
  • each access network device may determine whether to respond based on the above reasons indicated in the signaling. Should signal.
  • the synchronized access network device can respond to the signaling according to the above reasons indicated in the signaling, that is, perform related actions of releasing the MBS session or deleting the QoS flow.
  • Access network equipment that is not synchronized may not respond to the signaling based on the above reasons indicated in the signaling.
  • each synchronized access network equipment may perform the above step S902 or step S1002. At this time, the core network equipment will be forced to process a large amount of the same information. Based on this, the core network device can designate a synchronized access network device to perform the above step S902 or S1002. Alternatively, multiple synchronized access network devices may negotiate and determine that one of the access network devices performs the above step S902 or S1002. At this time, the core network equipment does not need to process a large amount of the same information, which reduces the data processing complexity of the core network equipment.
  • this application also provides another communication method. As shown in Figure 11, the method includes the following steps:
  • the access network device generates third indication information.
  • the third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN.
  • the maximum value and minimum value of the MBS QFI SN can be understood as capability values, that is, the maximum value that the MBS QFI SN can obtain and the minimum value that the MBS QFI SN can obtain.
  • the maximum and minimum values of the MBS QFI SN are used to limit the value range of the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow.
  • the value range of the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow can be any of the following: [0, maximum value], [minimum value, 2 N -1], or [minimum value, maximum value].
  • N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
  • the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN can be used to limit the overflow of the COUNT value, or the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN can be understood as the maximum value that the access network device can accept, and the maximum value that the access network device can accept. That is, the maximum MBS QFI SN corresponding to the COUNT value that does not overflow.
  • the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is less than 2 N -1.
  • the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN can be used to avoid the initial value of the HFN of RX_DELIV being negative.
  • the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is greater than 0.
  • the third indication information may explicitly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value, for example, the third indication information includes the maximum value and/or the minimum value.
  • the third indication information may implicitly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value.
  • the third indication information may include parameters for determining the maximum value and/or the minimum value. The parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value will be described in subsequent embodiments and will not be described again here.
  • a set of maximum values and/or a set of minimum values may be predefined, and in this case, the third indication information may include the index of the maximum value and/or the index of the minimum value.
  • the access network device sends third instruction information to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the third indication information from the access network device.
  • the core network device obtains the maximum value and/or the minimum value of MBS QFI SN.
  • the core network device can obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information.
  • step S1003 may be: the core network device determines the maximum value according to the parameters indicated by the third indication information, and /or, min.
  • the access network device may not send the third indication information, that is, the above steps S1101 and S1102 are optional steps.
  • the core network device can use default parameter values to determine the maximum value and/or minimum value of the MBS QFI SN; or use default values (such as default parameters, fixed values) to determine the MBS QFI The maximum value, and/or the minimum value of SN.
  • the access network device when the access network device indicates to the core network device some of the parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value, another part of the parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value may be Use default parameters or default parameter values.
  • steps S1104a-S1105a When a certain MRB is only associated with the first QoS flow, the following steps S1104a-S1105a may be performed; when a certain MRB is associated with the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow, the following steps S1104b-S1105b may be performed.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value of the above-mentioned MBS QFI SN, and/or, is greater than or equal to the minimum value of MBS QFI SN.
  • the value range of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet can be any of the following: [0, maximum value], [minimum value, 2 N -1], or [minimum value, maximum value].
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • the access network device sends the first data packet to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first data packet from the access network device.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet It is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the offset value.
  • K is the length of the HFN.
  • the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN that causes the COUNT value of the first data packet to overflow is discarded.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the offset value, so that the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV will not be a negative value.
  • the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is the above-mentioned maximum value, and this maximum value can ensure that the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
  • the COUNT of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN that makes the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV be a negative value is discarded. Furthermore, some MBS QFI SNs that will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be negative may also be discarded.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is 2 N -1, so that the maximum COUNT value of the first data packet is 2 N -1, The overflow of the COUNT value of the first data packet is avoided. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the value of the K high-order bits and the offset value of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the sum of the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first packet is equal to the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first packet.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not make the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
  • the core network device sends the first data packet and the second data packet to the access network device.
  • access network equipment Receive the first data packet and the second data packet from the core network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • the second data packet is a data packet of the second QoS flow.
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value of the above MBS QFI SN;
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN.
  • the value range of the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the data packets of the multiple QoS flows can be any of the following: [0, maximum value], [minimum value , 2 N -1], or [minimum value, maximum value].
  • “multiple” refers to two or more. This application only takes an MRB associated with two QoS as an example for explanation.
  • the access network device sends the first data packet and the second data packet to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first data packet and the second data packet from the access network device.
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet can refer to the MBS QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received in the first QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received in the second QoS flow, and the offset. The value is determined.
  • the method for determining the COUNT value of the second data packet is the same as the method for determining the COUNT value of the first data packet.
  • the value range of the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the second data packet is one of the above three ranges.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the second data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet and the second data packet will not overflow.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the QoS flow can start from the lower boundary of the value range, and then Increasingly until the value of the MBS QFI SN of the QoS flow is equal to the upper boundary of the value range. After the MBS QFI SN value of the QoS flow reaches the upper boundary, the MBS QFI SN value of the QoS flow starts again from the lower boundary of the value range, and so on.
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple QoS flows can start from the lower boundary of the value range, and then increase in sequence until the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple QoS flows The sum is equal to the upper bound of the value range. Subsequently, the MBS QFI SNs of some or all of the multiple QoS flows can be reset so that the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple QoS flows still starts from the lower boundary of the value range, and so on.
  • the access network device can release the MRB after the COUNT value of the MRB is equal to 2 N -1 this MRB and create another MRB.
  • the access network device can release the MRB and create a new MRB after the MBS QFI SN of the received data packet is equal to the lower boundary of the MBS QFI SN value range. Another MRB.
  • the access network device can release the MRB and create another MRB when the MBS QFI SN of the currently received data packet is smaller than the MBS QFI SN of the last received data packet.
  • the access network device can receive the MBS QFI SN of the data packets of the multiple QoS flows after the sum is equal to the lower boundary of the above value range. Release the MRB and create another MRB. Or, for any QoS flow among the multiple QoS flows, if the MBS QFI SN of the currently received data packet of the QoS flow is less than the MBS QFI SN of the last received data packet of the QoS flow, the access network The device can also release the MRB and create another MRB.
  • the newly created MRB and the released MRB can be associated with the same QoS flow.
  • the access network equipment can send the third indication information to the core network equipment to indicate the MBS QFI SN.
  • the maximum value and/or minimum value makes the maximum value and/or minimum value of MBS QFI SN flexible.
  • the access network device can flexibly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN to the core network device according to actual needs.
  • the access network equipment needs to avoid COUNT value overflow, it can indicate to the core network equipment the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN used to limit the COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow. Packet loss caused by overflow improves communication reliability.
  • the core network device can also obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, and can also make the maximum value and/or the minimum value flexibly variable.
  • the core network equipment can set the maximum value of MBS QFI SN that limits COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing COUNT value overflow caused by excessive MBS QFI SN.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN can only be 2 N -1, therefore, the COUNT value of the data packet
  • the maximum COUNT value is also 2 N -1, which avoids overflow of the COUNT value.
  • the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value.
  • the offset value is used to determine the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet.
  • MBS QFI SN max 2 N -Y
  • MBS QFI SN max represents the maximum value of MBS QFI SN
  • Y is an integer greater than 1.
  • Y can be a larger value defined by the protocol or preset. For example, when the length of the PDCP SN is 12 bits, Y can be defined or set to be greater than or equal to 4097; when the length of the PDCP SN is 18 bits, Y can be defined or set to be greater than or equal to 262145. If the core network device cannot know whether the length of the PDCP SN is 12 bits or 18 bits, you can define or set Y to be greater than or equal to 262145.
  • Y can satisfy the following formula: Y ⁇ X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 1
  • X represents the offset value
  • * represents the multiplication operation
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN
  • Q 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • MBS QFI SN max 2 N -2 [PDCP-SN-Size] -Q 1
  • the access network device can default the offset value to be equal to 1, thereby determining the COUNT value of the data packet based on the offset value being equal to 1.
  • MBS QFI SN max X*Q 3 -Q 0 ;
  • Q 0 , Q 3 , Q 4 and Q 5 are integers.
  • the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value.
  • MBS QFI SN min represents the minimum value of MBS QFI SN
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of PDCP SN
  • * represents multiplication operation.
  • MBS QFI SN min X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 2
  • X represents the offset value
  • Q 2 is an integer greater than or equal to 0.
  • MBS QFI SN min X*Q 6 +Q 7
  • Q 6 , Q 7 , Q 8 and Q 9 are integers.
  • the core network equipment can use Default parameter values are used for calculations.
  • the default PDCP SN length can be or 18; when calculating the minimum value, the default PDCP SN length can be 18 bits.
  • the default offset value can be 1 when calculating maximum and minimum values.
  • the method shown in Figure 11 can be executed before the core network device transmits the data packet of the MBS service to the access network device.
  • it can be executed during the MBS session establishment process.
  • it can also be executed at other times before the core network device transmits the data packet of the MBS service to the access network device, and this application does not specifically limit this.
  • this application also provides a communication method.
  • This communication method mainly involves the implementation of access network equipment.
  • the access network equipment perform the release and establishment of MRB.
  • the value range of the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow is [0, 2 N -1].
  • N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
  • the communication method shown in Figure 12 can be executed while the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow increases from 0 to 2 N -1. Referring to Figure 12, the communication method includes the following steps:
  • the core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service.
  • the first QoS flow may be associated with the first MRB.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first packet belongs to [0,2 N -1].
  • the access network device may send the first data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB, that is, the first data packet is carried on the first MRB.
  • the access network device releases the first MRB and establishes the second MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
  • step S1202 when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, releasing the first MRB may include: when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, and through the first After the MRB sends the first data packet to the terminal device, the first MRB is released.
  • the access network device releases the first MRB carrying the data packet and creates a second MRB. That is to say, in the process of increasing the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N -1, the access network device can perform the release and creation of the MRB at least once. After a new MRB is created, the COUNT value of the MRB's data packets can start from the minimum value that can be obtained. Therefore, the MBS QFI of the first QoS flow When SN increases from 0 to 2 N -1, the COUNT value can be flipped at least once, thereby reducing the risk of COUNT value overflow and improving communication reliability.
  • the above step S1202 can be used to release and release the MRB. New.
  • the method shown in Figure 12 may also include the following steps S1203-S1204:
  • the core network device sends the second data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the second data packet from the core network device.
  • the second data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • the access network device may send the second data packet to the terminal device through the third MRB, that is, the second data packet is carried on the third MRB.
  • the access network device releases the third MRB associated with the first QoS flow and establishes the fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
  • the access network equipment can release the current MRB and create a new MRB when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 2 N -1 to carry subsequent data packets.
  • the access network device may send the second data packet to the terminal device through the third MRB, and then release the third MRB after the second data packet is sent. That is to say, step S1204 can be understood as:
  • the access network device When the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is equal to 2 N -1, and after the access network device sends the second data packet to the terminal device, it releases the third MRB and establishes the fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
  • the third MRB can be used by the access network device away from the current one.
  • the latest MRB created during the release process; if the access network device has released and created an MRB once, then the third MRB and the second MRB are the same.
  • the first condition is related to the first value.
  • the first condition may include one of the following items:
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is equal to the first value.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value, which can also be understood as: the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and modulo the first value is equal to 0.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 divides the first value, which can also be understood as: the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 modulo the first value is equal to 0.
  • the first value is determined based on the length of the MBS QFI SN and/or the length of the PDCP SN.
  • S 1 represents the first numerical value
  • N represents the length of the MBS QFI SN
  • M is a positive integer
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN
  • * represents the multiplication operation
  • X represents the offset value
  • the offset value is used to determine HFN of the packet's COUNT value.
  • the first numerical value can satisfy any one of the above-mentioned formulas (a)-(e); when the first condition is the above-mentioned condition (2), the first value A numerical value can also satisfy any one of the above formulas (a)-(e); similarly, when the first condition is the above-mentioned condition (3), the first numerical value can also satisfy any of the above formulas (a)-(e). any kind. That is, the first numerical value may not be different depending on the first condition.
  • the first value is a preset value.
  • the preset value may be defined by the protocol, or may be determined by the access network device itself.
  • the preset value may be 10,000.
  • the preset value can also be other values, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on 2 M MRBs.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 .
  • the 2M MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
  • the access network device can divide the 2 N data packets into 2 M segments, each segment using one MRB carry.
  • the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow range from 0 to 15.
  • the MBS QFI SNs that can be divided by 4 after adding 1 are: 3, 7, 11, 15.
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 3; it releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB# when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 7. 3;
  • MRB#3 is released and MRB#4 is established;
  • MRB#5 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
  • the MRB is released when the MBS QFI SN (or COUNT value) of the data packet is equal to a certain value, which can be understood as: when the MRB QFI SN (or COUNT value) of the data packet is equal to the certain value , and after sending the data packet to the terminal device through the MRB, release the MRB. Or, it can be understood as: when the MBS QFI SN (or COUNT value) of the data packet is equal to a certain value, the access network device can release the MRB, but the specific release timing may need to be determined based on other conditions.
  • data packets may arrive out of order between the core network device and the access network device. That is, the access network equipment may receive the data packet with the larger MBS QFI SN first, and then the data packet with the smaller MBS QFI SN. At this time, if the MBS QFI SN of a data packet received by the access network device meets the first condition (recorded as data packet #A), but the data packet before the data packet #A has not been received, the access network device The device can start a timer. Before the timer expires, if the access network device receives the data packet before the data packet #A, the access network device can send the data packet #A and the data packet before it to the terminal device, and then release the MRB. Before the timer expires, if the access network device does not receive the data packet before the data packet #A, the access network device can release the MRB after the timer expires.
  • the access network device may not perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the MRB is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of this packet satisfies the following formula:
  • MBS QFI SN represents the MBS QFI SN of the data packet
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN
  • X represents the offset value. Indicates rounding down.
  • the first The conditions include the above condition (2).
  • the position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (a) can also be determined by the following conditions:
  • the specific release timing can be determined based on the reception status of the terminal device. For example, when the COUNT value of a certain data packet meets the conditions for releasing the MRB, the access network device can send the data packet (recorded as data packet #B) to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can report the COUNT value of the successfully received data packet to the access network device.
  • the access network device releases the MRB.
  • the terminal device can report RX_DELIV to the access network device.
  • the RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the COUNT value of data packet #B, the access network device releases the MRB.
  • the access network device can be configured to report the COUNT value or RX_DELIV condition of successfully received data packets to the terminal device.
  • 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on multiple MRBs.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 .
  • the multiple MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
  • the access network device can divide the 2 N data packets into multiple segments, and each segment is carried by one MRB.
  • the first condition includes the above condition (2).
  • the first value is a preset value. Assume that N is equal to 4 and the first value is equal to 5.
  • the 16 data of the first QoS flow The MBS QFI SN of the package is 0 to 15. Among them, the MBS QFI SNs that can be divided evenly by 5 after adding 1 are: 4, 9, 14.
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 4; it releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB# when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 9. 3; When the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 14, MRB#3 is released and MRB#4 is established.
  • the access network equipment can to perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the access network device releases MRB#4 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15, and establishes MRB#5.
  • MRB#5 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet satisfies the following formula:
  • MBS QFI SN represents the MBS QFI SN of the data packet
  • PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN
  • S 1 represents the first value
  • X represents the offset value. Indicates rounding down.
  • the first condition includes the above condition (2)
  • the first The position where the MRB is released when the value is the preset value can also be determined by the following conditions:
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow is 0 to 4.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the data packet in the first QoS flow is 5 to 9 and 10 to 14, the corresponding COUNT value is 4 to 8.
  • the access network device releases and creates a new data packet when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 8. MRB.
  • the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the 16 first QoS flows
  • the MBS QFI SN of the packet is 0 to 15.
  • the MBS QFI SNs that are greater than 0 and can be evenly divided by 4 are: 4, 8, 12.
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 4; it releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB# when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 8. 3; When the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 12, MRB#3 is released and MRB#4 is established.
  • the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the access network device releases MRB#4 and establishes MRB#5 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15.
  • MRB#5 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
  • 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on two MRBs.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 .
  • the two MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
  • the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (e)
  • N is equal to 4
  • X is equal to 1
  • PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 2
  • the first value is equal to 11
  • the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow are 0 to 15.
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 11.
  • the access network device performs the above step S1202
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the data packet
  • the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN and the offset value X, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first MRB packet is equal to the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the minimum HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB may be equal to P 1 and the maximum HFN may be equal to P 1 +X-1.
  • P 1 is an integer greater than 1
  • P 1 +X is less than 2 K . That is, the minimum COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be [P 1,0 ], and the maximum COUNT value can be [P 1 +X-1,2 PDCP-SN-Size ].
  • the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the access network device releases MRB#3 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15, and establishes MRB#3.
  • MRB#3 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet in the first MRB is equal to the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value X
  • the PDCP SN of the COUNT value is equal to the data
  • the first condition includes the above condition (3).
  • the position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (e) can also be determined by the following conditions :
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 15.
  • the corresponding MBS QFI SN is equal to 11, that is, the corresponding positions of releasing MRB in Figure 15a and Figure 15b are the same.
  • the minimum COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be [P 1,0 ]
  • the maximum COUNT value can be [P 1 +X-1,2 PDCP-SN-Size ].
  • P 1 please refer to the above related information. illustrate. In Figure 15b, P 1 and X are equal to 1 as an example for illustration.
  • the scenario where the MRB is released and created when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not include the scenario where the MRB is released and created when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on two MRBs.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 .
  • the two MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
  • the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (c)
  • N is equal to 4 and PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 2
  • the first value is equal to 3, as shown in Figure 16a
  • the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow are 0 to 15.
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 3, and Create MRB#2.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the data packet
  • the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN and the offset value X, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first MRB packet is equal to the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB may be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the access network device releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB#3 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15.
  • MRB#3 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet in the first MRB is equal to the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value X
  • the PDCP SN of the COUNT value is equal to the data
  • the first condition includes the above condition (3).
  • the position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (c) can also be determined by the following conditions :
  • the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the MRB is released and created. This may not include the scenario where the MRB is released and created when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on two MRBs.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 .
  • the two MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
  • the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (d)
  • N is equal to 4 and PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 3
  • the first value is greater than or equal to 1, such as As shown in Figure 17a, the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow range from 0 to 15.
  • the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 1.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the data packet
  • the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN and the offset value X, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first MRB packet is equal to the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB may be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • the access network device releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB#3 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15.
  • MRB#3 can be used to carry the first QoS flow subsequent packets.
  • the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet in the first MRB is equal to the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value X
  • the PDCP SN of the COUNT value is equal to the data
  • the first condition includes the above condition (3).
  • the position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (d) can also be determined by the following conditions :
  • the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to [X,0.5*2 PDCP-SN-Size -1]
  • the first MRB is released and the second MRB is established.
  • N is 4 to 5. Since N is equal to 4 , The access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 5.
  • the COUNT value is equal to 5
  • the corresponding MBS QFI SN is equal to 1, that is, the corresponding position of releasing the MRB in Figure 17a and Figure 17b is the same.
  • the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
  • the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
  • Figures 13a to 17b take a process in which the MBS QFI SN increases from 0 to 2 N -1 as an example, or one MBS QFI SN cycle as an example.
  • the access network equipment can use the method shown in Figure 12 to release and create new MRBs.
  • the above embodiment takes the MBS service scenario as an example for description.
  • the methods described in the embodiments of this application can also be appropriately modified to be applied to other scenarios, for example, to unicast service scenarios.
  • the MBS QFI SN in this application can be replaced with the MBS QFI SN in the unicast service accordingly.
  • QFI SN Alternatively, it can be applied to determine parameter B based on parameter A. If parameter A reaches the upper limit before parameter B, parameter B may overflow.
  • the methods and/or steps implemented by the access network equipment can also be implemented by components (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, and logic modules) that can be used in the access network equipment. , or software such as chips or circuits); the methods and/or steps implemented by the core network equipment may also have components that can be used in the core network equipment (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, logic modules, or software Such as chip or circuit) implementation.
  • this application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the various methods mentioned above.
  • the communication device may be the access network equipment in the above method embodiment, or a device including the above access network equipment, or a component that can be used in the access network equipment, such as a chip or a chip system; or, the communication device may be
  • the core network equipment in the above method embodiment is either a device including the above core network equipment, or a component that can be used in the core network equipment, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving the hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • Embodiments of the present application can divide the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiments.
  • functional modules can be divided into corresponding functional modules, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, it can be There are other ways to divide.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic structural diagram of an access network device 180.
  • the access network device 180 includes a processing module 1801 and a transceiver module 1802.
  • the access network device 180 may also include a storage module (not shown in Figure 18) for storing program instructions and data.
  • the transceiver module 1802 which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement sending and/or receiving functions.
  • the transceiver module 1802 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver module 1802 may include a receiving module and a transmitting module, respectively configured to perform the receiving and transmitting steps performed by the access network device in the above method embodiments, and/or to support the steps described herein.
  • the processing module 1801 can be used to perform steps of the processing class (such as determination, generation, etc.) performed by the access network device in the above method embodiments, and/or to support the technology described herein. Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 1802 is configured to receive the first data packet from the core network device.
  • the first data packet is the data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS service, and the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence of the first data packet. No. QFI SN is less than the first threshold;
  • the transceiver module 1802 is also used to send first indication information to the core network device.
  • the first indication information is used by the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than Or equal to 0, and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  • the processing module 1801 is used to generate the first indication information.
  • Processing module 1801 generates second indication information
  • the transceiver module 1802 is configured to send second instruction information to the core network device.
  • the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service; or, The second instruction information is used by the core network device to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the processing module 1801 is configured to generate third indication information, and the third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN;
  • the transceiver module 1802 is configured to send the third indication information to the core network device.
  • the transceiver module 1802 is configured to receive the first data packet from the core network device, where the first data packet is the data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS;
  • the processing module 1801 is configured to release the first MBS radio bearer MRB associated with the first QoS when the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, and establish the second MRB associated with the first QoS flow. MRB, the first data packet is carried in the first MRB.
  • the access network device 180 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • a “module” here may refer to an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, an integrated logic circuit, and/or others that may provide the above functions. device.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the access network device 180 may take the form of the communication device 300 shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1801 in Figure 18 can be implemented by the processor 301 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 303.
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1802 in Figure 18 can be implemented through the communication interface 304 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 .
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1802 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the processing module The function/implementation process of 1801 can be realized through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
  • the access network device 180 provided in this embodiment can perform the above method, the technical effects it can obtain can be referred to the above method embodiment, which will not be described again here.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a core network device 190.
  • the core network device 190 includes a processing module 1901 and a transceiver module 1902.
  • the core network device 190 may also include a storage module (not shown in Figure 19) for storing program instructions and data.
  • the transceiver module 1902 which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement sending and/or receiving functions.
  • the transceiver module 1902 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver module 1902 may include a receiving module and a sending module, respectively configured to perform the receiving and sending steps performed by the core network device in the above method embodiments, and/or to support the steps described herein.
  • the processing module 1901 can be used to perform steps of the processing class (such as determination, generation, etc.) performed by the core network device in the above method embodiments, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the transceiver module 1902 is configured to send a first data packet to the access network device.
  • the first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS, and the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number of the first data packet QFI SN is less than the first threshold;
  • the transceiver module 1902 is also used to receive the first indication information from the access network device;
  • the processing module 1901 is configured to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
  • the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  • the transceiver module 1902 is configured to receive the second instruction information from the access network device; the processing module 1901 is configured to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service ; Alternatively, the processing module 1901 is configured to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second indication information, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  • the processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN.
  • the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the MBS QFI SN. Length; the transceiver module 1902 is used to send the first data packet.
  • the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or is greater than or equal to the minimum value.
  • the first data packet is the first quality of service of the MBS service. QoS flow packets.
  • the processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN.
  • the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the MBS QFI SN.
  • the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or, the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet Greater than or equal to the minimum value, the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with an MBS radio bearer MRB.
  • the processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, including: the processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third instruction information received by the transceiver module 1902. , and/or, minimum value.
  • the core network device 190 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • Module here may refer to ASICs, circuits, processors and memories that execute one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
  • the core network device 190 may take the form of the communication device 300 shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1901 in Figure 19 can be implemented by the processor 301 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 303.
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1902 in Figure 19 can be implemented through the communication interface 304 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 .
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1902 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the processing module 1901 The function/implementation process can be realized by the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
  • the core network device 190 provided in this embodiment can perform the above method, the technical effects it can obtain can be referred to the above method embodiment, which will not be described again here.
  • the access network equipment or core network equipment described in the embodiments of this application can also be implemented using the following: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), Programmable logic device (PLD), controller, state machine, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuit, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
  • FPGA field programmable gate arrays
  • PLD Programmable logic device
  • state machine state machine
  • gate logic discrete hardware components
  • discrete hardware components any other suitable circuit, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a communication device, which includes a processor and is configured to implement the method in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • This memory is used to store necessary computer programs and data.
  • the computer program may include instructions, and the processor may call the instructions in the computer program stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to perform the method in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the memory may not be in the communication device.
  • the communication device further includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data reading and writing interface circuit.
  • the interface circuit is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in the memory and may be directly read from memory, or possibly through other devices) and transferred to the processor.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, which is used to communicate with modules external to the communication device.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may be composed of a chip or may include a chip and other discrete devices. This is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which computer programs or instructions are stored.
  • the computer program When the program or instructions are executed by the computer, the functions of any of the above method embodiments are implemented.
  • This application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
  • the systems, devices and methods described in this application can also be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • a software program it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • computer program instructions When computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes (or functions) described in the embodiments of this application are implemented.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the medium.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
  • the computer may include the aforementioned device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: an access network device receives a first data packet from a core network device, and sends first indication information to the core network device, wherein the first data packet is a data packet of a first QoS flow of a multicast and broadcast service (MBS), and an MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than a first threshold; and after receiving the first indication information from the access network device, the core network device sets an MBS QFI SN of a second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information, wherein the second data packet is a data packet after the first data packet, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. On the basis of the solution, when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow does not reach the first threshold, the core network device can reset the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow, thereby effectively reducing overflow of a COUNT value in the access network device caused by too large MBS QFI SN, thus reducing packet loss caused by the overflow of the COUNT value.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
本申请要求于2022年04月24日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210436049.6、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on April 24, 2022, with application number 202210436049.6 and application title "A communication method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference. .
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的数据(data)协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)由COUNT值标识。如图1所示,COUNT值由高位的超帧号(hyper frame number,HFN)和低位的PDCP序列号(sequence number,SN)组成。通常,发送端向接收端发送的PDCP PDU包括PDCP SN,接收侧根据该PDCP SN推算HFN,从而确定该PDCP PDU的COUNT值。The data protocol data unit (PDU) of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer is identified by the COUNT value. As shown in Figure 1, the COUNT value consists of the high-order hyperframe number (HFN) and the low-order PDCP sequence number (SN). Usually, the PDCP PDU sent by the sender to the receiver includes the PDCP SN, and the receiver calculates the HFN based on the PDCP SN to determine the COUNT value of the PDCP PDU.
对于某一多播广播业务(multicast and broadcast service,MBS),为了使不同的接入网设备针对该业务的同一数据包生成相同的COUNT值,核心网设备为服务质量(quality of service,QoS)流(flow)的每个数据包生成QoS流标识(QoS flow identifier,QFI)SN,以便不同的接入网设备根据该QFI SN生成COUNT值。For a certain multicast and broadcast service (MBS), in order to enable different access network equipment to generate the same COUNT value for the same data packet of the service, the core network equipment is quality of service (QoS). Each data packet of the flow generates a QoS flow identifier (QFI) SN so that different access network devices can generate COUNT values based on the QFI SN.
其中,QFI SN的比特数和COUNT值的比特数相同。在MRB和QoS流是一对一的关系时,接入网设备通常截取QFI SN的高位作为COUNT值的HFN,低位作为COUNT值的PDCP SN。Among them, the number of bits of QFI SN is the same as the number of bits of COUNT value. When the MRB and QoS flow have a one-to-one relationship, the access network device usually intercepts the high bits of the QFI SN as the HFN of the COUNT value, and the low bits as the PDCP SN of the COUNT value.
然而,为了避免接收端维护的状态变量RX_DELIV的初始HFN为负值的情况出现,接入网设备通常会采用一定的措施。例如,接入网在生成COUNT值时,会在通过QFI SN生成的HFN的基础上加某个数值作为COUNT值对应的HFN。即对于某个数据包,COUNT值对应的HFN可能会大于QFI SN的高位值。可能会出现COUNT值已经到达上限,而QFI SN还未到达上限的情况,而COUNT值达到上限(或称溢出)会导致丢包,从而影响业务的可靠性。However, in order to avoid the situation where the initial HFN of the state variable RX_DELIV maintained by the receiving end is a negative value, the access network equipment usually takes certain measures. For example, when the access network generates a COUNT value, it will add a certain value to the HFN generated through the QFI SN as the HFN corresponding to the COUNT value. That is, for a certain data packet, the HFN corresponding to the COUNT value may be greater than the high value of QFI SN. It may happen that the COUNT value has reached the upper limit, but the QFI SN has not yet reached the upper limit. If the COUNT value reaches the upper limit (or overflow), it will cause packet loss, thus affecting the reliability of the service.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法及装置,能够有效减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,从而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包。This application provides a communication method and device that can effectively reduce COUNT value overflow caused by excessive MBS QFI SN, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow.
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由核心网设备执行,也可以由核心网设备的部件,例如核心网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分核心网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:向接入网设备发送第一数据包。其中,该第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包,该第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值。接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息,并根据第一指示信息设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN。其中,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包。In the first aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be executed by a core network device, or by a component of the core network device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the core network device. It can also be executed by a device capable of implementing Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions. The method includes: sending a first data packet to an access network device. Wherein, the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold. Receive first indication information from the access network device, and set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
基于本申请的方案,接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,使得核心网设备能够在第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值时,基于第一指示信息设置第二数据包的MBS  QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。也就是说,核心网设备可以在第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN未达到第一阈值时,重新设置该第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN,有效减少MBS QFI SN过大导致接入网设备中的COUNT值溢出,从而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高业务的可靠性。Based on the solution of this application, the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device, so that the core network device can set the second data packet based on the first indication information when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold. MBS The QFI SN is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. That is to say, the core network device can reset the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow does not reach the first threshold, effectively reducing the problem caused by excessive MBS QFI SN. The COUNT value in the access network equipment overflows, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving service reliability.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由接入网设备执行,也可以由接入网设备的部件,例如接入网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分接入网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包,并向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。其中,第一数据包为MBS业务的QoS流的数据包,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值。第一指示信息用于核心网设备设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包。其中,第二方面所带来的技术效果可参考上述第一方面所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。In the second aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be executed by the access network device, or by components of the access network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions. The method includes: receiving a first data packet from a core network device and sending first indication information to the core network device. Wherein, the first data packet is a data packet of the QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold. The first indication information is used by the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow. The MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. The data packet is the data packet after the first data packet. Among them, the technical effects brought by the second aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be described again here.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,该第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
指示第一MBS无线承载MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值的信息,其中,第一MRB为第一QoS流关联的MRB;Information indicating that the maximum COUNT value of data packets of the first MBS radio bearer MRB is equal to the second threshold, where the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow;
指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息,其中,M1为正整数;Information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer;
指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值的信息;Information indicating a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold;
第一MRB的状态信息;Status information of the first MRB;
指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值的信息;Information indicating that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold;
指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息,其中,M2为正整数;或者,Information indicating that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2, where M2 is a positive integer; or,
指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值的信息。Information indicating the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
基于该可能的设计,第一指示信息包括指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息,或包括指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息时,表示接入网设备在第一MRB的最大COUNT值接近第二阈值,或者,第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN接近第三阈值时,向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,为第一指示信息的传输预留了较长的时间,使得核心网设备能够在COUNT值溢出前收到第一指示信息,并根据第一指示信息设置第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,有效减少MBS QFI SN过大导致接入网设备中的COUNT值溢出,从而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高业务的可靠性。Based on this possible design, the first indication information includes information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, or includes information indicating the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow When the difference between the third threshold and the information of M2 is less than or equal to M2, it means that the maximum COUNT value of the access network device in the first MRB is close to the second threshold, or the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is close to the third threshold. When , the first indication information is sent to the core network device, and a long time is reserved for the transmission of the first indication information, so that the core network device can receive the first indication information before the COUNT value overflows, and according to the first indication information Setting the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet effectively reduces the COUNT value overflow in the access network equipment caused by excessive MBS QFI SN, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving service reliability.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识。In conjunction with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first MRB, an identifier of the first QoS flow, or an identifier of the MBS service.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包,包括:第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第M3个数据包。M3小于或等于M1+1,M1为第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的最大差值,第一MRB为第一QoS流关联的MRB。或者,M3小于或等于M2+1,M2为第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的最大差值。In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet, including: the second data packet is the M3th data packet after the first data packet. M3 is less than or equal to M1+1, M1 is the maximum difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold, and the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow. Or, M3 is less than or equal to M2+1, and M2 is the maximum difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
第三方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由核心网设备执行,也可以由核心网设备的部件,例如核心网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分核心网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:接收来自接入网设备的第二指示信息。 根据第二指示信息释放多播广播业务MBS业务第一MBS会话,并建立MBS业务的第二MBS会话。或者,根据第二指示信息删除第一MBS会话的第一服务质量QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。In the third aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be executed by the core network equipment, or by components of the core network equipment, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the core network equipment. It can also be implemented by Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions. The method includes: receiving second indication information from the access network device. Release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Alternatively, delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second indication information, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
基于该方案,核心网设备可以基于接入网设备的第二指示信息释放MBS业务的第一MBS会话,并建立该MBS业务的第二MBS会话。由于第一MBS会话被释放时,该第一MBS会话的QoS流被删除,在新建第二MBS会话后,该第二MBS会话中的QoS流也是新建的,因此,核心网设备后续在通过第二MBS会话中的QoS流传输MBS业务的数据包时,该数据包的MBS QFI SN可以从0开始,相应的该数据包的COUNT值较小。从而,接入网设备可以根据实际情况,例如在COUNT值即将溢出时,发送该第二指示信息,使得后续数据包的MBS QFI SN较小,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致接入网设备中的COUNT值溢出,进而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高业务的可靠性。Based on this solution, the core network device can release the first MBS session of the MBS service based on the second instruction information of the access network device, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Because when the first MBS session is released, the QoS flow of the first MBS session is deleted. After the second MBS session is created, the QoS flow in the second MBS session is also newly created. Therefore, the core network device subsequently passes the third MBS session. When the QoS stream in the second MBS session transmits the data packet of the MBS service, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, and the corresponding COUNT value of the data packet is smaller. Therefore, the access network device can send the second indication information according to the actual situation, for example, when the COUNT value is about to overflow, so that the MBS QFI SN of subsequent data packets is smaller, thereby reducing the problem of excessive MBS QFI SN in the access network device. COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving service reliability.
或者,核心网设备可以基于接入网设备的第二指示信息删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。由于第二QoS流是新添加的,因此,核心网设备后续在通过第二QoS流传输MBS业务的数据包时,该数据包的MBS QFI SN可以从0开始,从而可以减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,提高业务的可靠性。Alternatively, the core network device may delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session based on the second indication information of the access network device, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. Since the second QoS flow is newly added, when the core network equipment subsequently transmits the MBS service data packet through the second QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, thereby reducing the MBS QFI SN from being too large. The resulting COUNT value overflows and improves business reliability.
第四方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由接入网设备执行,也可以由接入网设备的部件,例如接入网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分接入网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:生成第二指示信息,并向核心网设备发送该第二指示信息。其中,该第二指示信息用于核心网设备释放多播广播业务MBS业务的第一MBS会话,并建立MBS业务的第二MBS会话。或者,第二指示信息用于核心网设备删除第一MBS会话的第一服务质量QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。其中,第四方面所带来的技术效果可参考上述第三方面所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。In the fourth aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be executed by the access network device, or by components of the access network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by the access network device. It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions. The method includes: generating second indication information and sending the second indication information to the core network device. The second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service and to establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Alternatively, the second instruction information is used by the core network device to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. Among them, the technical effects brought by the fourth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the above-mentioned third aspect, which will not be described again here.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在一种可能的设计中,第二指示信息包括以下至少一项:Combined with the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible design, the second indication information includes at least one of the following:
指示第一MBS无线承载MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值的信息,其中,第一MRB为第一QoS流关联的MRB;Information indicating that the maximum COUNT value of data packets of the first MBS radio bearer MRB is equal to the second threshold, where the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow;
指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息,其中,M1为正整数;Information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer;
指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值的信息;Information indicating a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold;
第一MRB的状态信息;Status information of the first MRB;
指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值的信息;Information indicating that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold;
指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息,其中,M2为正整数;或者,Information indicating that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2, where M2 is a positive integer; or,
指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值的信息。Information indicating the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
第五方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由接入网设备执行,也可以由接入网设备的部件,例如接入网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分接入网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:生成第三指示信息,并向核心网设备发送该第三指示信息。其中,该第三指示信息指示多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值。In the fifth aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be executed by the access network device, or by components of the access network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by the access network device. It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions. The method includes: generating third indication information and sending the third indication information to the core network device. Wherein, the third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN.
基于该方案,接入网设备可以向核心网设备发送第三指示信息,以指示MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值,使得MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值灵活可变。例如,接入网设备可以根据实际需求,灵活地向核心网设备指示MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值。在接入网设 备需要避免COUNT值溢出时,可以向核心网设备指示用于限制COUNT值溢出的MBS QFI SN的最大值,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致接入网设备中的COUNT值溢出,进而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高业务的可靠性。Based on this solution, the access network device can send third indication information to the core network device to indicate the maximum value and/or minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, so that the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN can be flexibly changed. For example, the access network device can flexibly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN to the core network device according to actual needs. In access network equipment When the equipment needs to avoid COUNT value overflow, it can indicate to the core network equipment the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN used to limit the COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow in the access network equipment caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large, thereby reducing the risk of COUNT value overflow. Packet loss caused by value overflow improves service reliability.
此外,接入网设备向核心网设备指示MBS QFI SN的最小值的情况下,由于数据包的COUNT值等于数据包的MBS QFI SN,而MBS QFI SN最大只能为2N-1,因此,数据包的最大COUNT值也为2N-1,避免了COUNT值的溢出,从而提高业务的可靠性。In addition, when the access network device indicates the minimum value of MBS QFI SN to the core network device, since the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN can only be 2 N -1, therefore, The maximum COUNT value of a data packet is also 2 N -1, which avoids overflow of the COUNT value and thus improves service reliability.
在一种可能的设计中,最大值小于2N-1,最小值大于0,N是MBS QFI SN的长度。In one possible design, the maximum value is less than 2 N -1 and the minimum value is greater than 0, where N is the length of the MBS QFI SN.
第六方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由核心网设备执行,也可以由核心网设备的部件,例如核心网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分核心网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。其中,最大值小于2N-1,最小值大于0,N是MBS QFI SN的长度。发送第一数据包,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于或等于最大值,和/或,大于或等于最小值,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包。The sixth aspect provides a communication method, which can be executed by the core network device, or can be executed by components of the core network device, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the core network device, or can be implemented by Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions. The method includes: obtaining the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN. Among them, the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the length of MBS QFI SN. Send the first data packet, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or is greater than or equal to the minimum value, and the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service.
基于该方案,核心网设备可以获取MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值,同样可以使得该最大值和/或最小值灵活可变。在需要避免COUNT值溢出时,核心网设备可以设置限制COUNT值溢出的MBS QFI SN的最大值,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出。或者,核心网设备可以设置MBS QFI SN的最小值,此时,由于数据包的COUNT值等于数据包的MBS QFI SN,而MBS QFI SN最大只能为2N-1,因此,数据包的最大COUNT值也为2N-1,避免了接入网设备中COUNT值的溢出,从而提高业务的可靠性。Based on this solution, the core network equipment can obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, and can also make the maximum value and/or the minimum value flexible. When it is necessary to avoid COUNT value overflow, the core network equipment can set the maximum value of MBS QFI SN that limits COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing COUNT value overflow caused by excessive MBS QFI SN. Alternatively, the core network equipment can set the minimum value of MBS QFI SN. At this time, since the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN can only be 2 N -1, therefore, the maximum value of the data packet The COUNT value is also 2 N -1, which avoids the overflow of the COUNT value in the access network equipment, thus improving the reliability of the service.
第七方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由核心网设备执行,也可以由核心网设备的部件,例如核心网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分核心网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。其中,最大值小于2N-1,最小值大于0,N是MBS QFI SN的长度。发送第一数据包和第二数据包,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,第二数据包为MBS业务的第二QoS流的数据包。其中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和小于或等于最大值;和/或,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和大于或等于最小值,第一QoS流和第二QoS流关联一个MRB。其中,第七方面所带来的技术效果可参考上述第六方面所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。The seventh aspect provides a communication method, which can be executed by the core network equipment, or can be executed by components of the core network equipment, such as the processor, chip, or chip system of the core network equipment, or can be implemented by Logic modules or software implementation of all or part of the core network equipment functions. The method includes: obtaining the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN. Among them, the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the length of MBS QFI SN. A first data packet and a second data packet are sent. The first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the MBS service, and the second data packet is a data packet of the second QoS flow of the MBS service. Wherein, the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or, the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet Greater than or equal to the minimum value, the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with one MRB. Among them, the technical effects brought by the seventh aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the above-mentioned sixth aspect, which will not be described again here.
在一种可能的设计中,获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值,包括:接收来自接入网设备的第三指示信息;根据第三指示信息获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。In one possible design, obtaining the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN includes: receiving third indication information from the access network device; obtaining the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information, and/or, min.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,MBS QFI SN的最大值是根据MBS QFI SN的长度N、分组数据汇聚协议序列号PDCP SN的长度、或偏移值中的至少一项确定的。或者,MBS QFI SN的最小值是根据MBS QFI SN的长度N、PDCP SN的长度、或偏移值中的至少一项确定的。其中,偏移值用于确定数据包的COUNT值的超帧号HFN。Combined with the fifth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, in a possible design, the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is based on the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the packet data convergence protocol sequence number PDCP SN, or the offset At least one of the values is determined. Alternatively, the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value. Among them, the offset value is used to determine the superframe number HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,MBS QFI SN的最大值,满足如下公式:
MBS QFI SNmax=2N-Y
Combining the fifth, sixth or seventh aspect, in a possible design, the maximum value of MBS QFI SN satisfies the following formula:
MBS QFI SN max =2 N -Y
其中,MBS QFI SNmax表示MBS QFI SN的最大值,Y为大于1的整数。Among them, MBS QFI SN max represents the maximum value of MBS QFI SN, and Y is an integer greater than 1.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,Y满足如下公式:
Y≥X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]+Q1
Combining the fifth, sixth or seventh aspect, in a possible design, Y satisfies the following formula:
Y≥X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 1
其中,X表示偏移值,*表示乘法运算,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,Q1为大 于或等于1的整数。Among them, X represents the offset value, * represents the multiplication operation, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, and Q 1 is the maximum An integer equal to or equal to 1.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,MBS QFI SN的最小值、PDCP SN的长度满足如下公式中的一种:Combined with the fifth, sixth or seventh aspect, in a possible design, the minimum value of MBS QFI SN and the length of PDCP SN satisfy one of the following formulas:
MBS QFI SNmin=2[PDCP-SN-Size]
MBS QFI SNmin=X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]+Q2;或,
MBS QFI SNmin=0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1
MBS QFI SN min =2 [PDCP-SN-Size] ;
MBS QFI SN min =X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 2 ; or,
MBS QFI SN min =0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1
其中,MBS QFI SNmin表示MBS QFI SN的最小值,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,X表示偏移值,*表示乘法运算,Q2为大于或等于0的整数。Among them, MBS QFI SN min represents the minimum value of MBS QFI SN, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of PDCP SN, X represents the offset value, * represents multiplication operation, and Q 2 is an integer greater than or equal to 0.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最大值时,数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值之和,K为HFN的长度。In combination with the fifth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, in a possible design, when the third indication information indicates the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the K of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet. The sum of the value of the high-order bits and the offset value, K is the length of HFN.
基于该可能的设计,第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值之和,使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值不会为负值。并且,第一数据包的最大MBS QFI SN为上述最大值,而该最大值可以保证第一数据包的COUNT值不会溢出。因此,在该方式中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。Based on this possible design, the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the offset value, so that the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV will not be a negative value. . Moreover, the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is the above-mentioned maximum value, and this maximum value can ensure that the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最小值时,数据包的COUNT值等于数据包的MBS QFI SN。Combined with the fifth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, in a possible design, when the third indication information indicates the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
基于该可能的设计,第一数据包的COUNT值等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,且第一数据包的最大MBS QFI SN为2N-1,使得第一数据包的最大COUNT值为2N-1,避免了第一数据包的COUNT值的溢出。因此,在该方式中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。Based on this possible design, the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is 2 N -1, so that the maximum COUNT value of the first data packet is 2 N -1, avoids the overflow of the COUNT value of the first data packet. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
结合第五方面或第六方面或第七方面,在一种可能的设计中,第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最大值和最小值时,数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值之和,K为HFN的长度;或者,数据包的COUNT值等于数据包的MBS QFI SN。In combination with the fifth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, in a possible design, when the third indication information indicates the maximum value and minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI of the data packet. The sum of the value of the K high-order bits of SN and the offset value, K is the length of HFN; alternatively, the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
基于该可能的设计,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。Based on this possible design, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not make the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
第八方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由接入网设备执行,也可以由接入网设备的部件,例如接入网设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分接入网设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包,该第一数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放第一QoS关联的第一MRB,并建立第一QoS流关联的第二MRB,第一数据包承载于第一MRB。第一数据包为MBS的第一QoS流的数据包。In an eighth aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be executed by the access network device, or can be executed by a component of the access network device, such as a processor, chip, or chip system of the access network device. It can also be executed by It is implemented by logical modules or software that can realize all or part of the access network equipment functions. The method includes: receiving a first data packet from a core network device, and when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets a first condition, releasing a first MRB associated with the first QoS flow, and establishing a second MRB associated with the first QoS flow. MRB, the first data packet is carried in the first MRB. The first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS.
基于该方案,接入网设备在收到的数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放承载该数据包的第一MRB,并新建第二MRB。也就是说,在第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0增加至2N-1的过程中,接入网设备可以执行至少一次MRB的释放与新建。在新建MRB后,该MRB的数据包的COUNT值可以从能够取到的最小值开始。因此,在第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0增加至2N-1的过程中,COUNT值可以至少翻转一次,从而降低COUNT值溢出的风险。Based on this solution, when the MBS QFI SN of the received data packet meets the first condition, the access network device releases the first MRB carrying the data packet and creates a second MRB. That is to say, in the process of increasing the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N -1, the access network device can perform the release and creation of the MRB at least once. After a new MRB is created, the COUNT value of the MRB's data packets can start from the minimum value that can be obtained. Therefore, in the process of the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow increasing from 0 to 2 N -1, the COUNT value can be flipped at least once, thereby reducing the risk of COUNT value overflow.
在一种可能的设计中,第一条件和第一数值相关。其中,第一数值是根据MBS QFI SN 的长度,和/或,分组数据汇聚协议序列号PDCP SN的长度确定的;或者,第一数值为预设值。In one possible design, the first condition is related to the first value. Among them, the first value is based on MBS QFI SN The length of the packet data convergence protocol sequence number PDCP SN is determined; or the first value is a preset value.
在一种可能的设计中,第一条件包括:第一数据包的MBS QFI SN大于0且整除第一数值;或者,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN加1整除第一数值;或者,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN等于第一数值。In a possible design, the first condition includes: the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value; or, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 is evenly divided by the first value; or, the first The MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to the first value.
在一种可能的设计中,第一数值满足如下公式中的一种:
S1=2N-M
S1=2N-M-1;
S1=2PDCP-SN-Size-1;
S1≥0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1-1;或,
S1=2N-X*2PDCP-SN-Size-1
In a possible design, the first value satisfies one of the following formulas:
S 1 = 2NM
S 1 =2 NM -1;
S 1 =2 PDCP-SN-Size -1;
S 1 ≥0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 -1; or,
S 1 =2 N -X*2 PDCP-SN-Size -1
其中,S1表示第一数值,N表示MBS QFI SN的长度,M为正整数,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,*表示乘法运算,X表示偏移值,偏移值用于确定数据包的COUNT值的超帧号HFN。Among them, S 1 represents the first numerical value, N represents the length of the MBS QFI SN, M is a positive integer, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, * represents the multiplication operation, X represents the offset value, and the offset value is used to determine The superframe number HFN of the packet's COUNT value.
在一种可能的设计中,第一QoS流的2N个数据包,承载于2M个MRB,其中,2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1In one possible design, 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow are carried on 2 M MRBs. Among the 2 N data packets, the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 0. QFI SN is 2 N-1 .
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自核心网设备的第二数据包,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时,释放第一QoS关联的第三MRB,并建立第一QoS流关联的第四MRB,第二数据包承载于第三MRB,第二数据包为第一QoS流的数据包。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving a second data packet from the core network device, and when the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is equal to 2 N -1, releasing the third MRB associated with the first QoS, and A fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow is established, the second data packet is carried in the third MRB, and the second data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
第九方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括接入网设备和核心网设备。其中,核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一数据包,相应的,接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包。其中,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值。In a ninth aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes access network equipment and core network equipment. The core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device, and correspondingly, the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device. Wherein, the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold.
接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息,并根据第一指示信息设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包。The access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the first indication information from the access network device and sets the MBS of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. QFI SN, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
第十方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括接入网设备和核心网设备。其中,接入网设备生成第二指示信息,并向核心网设备发送该第二指示信息。相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第二指示信息,并根据第二指示信息释放MBS业务第一MBS会话,并建立MBS业务的第二MBS会话;或者,根据第二指示信息删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。In a tenth aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes access network equipment and core network equipment. The access network device generates second indication information and sends the second indication information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the second instruction information from the access network device, releases the first MBS session of the MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establishes the second MBS session of the MBS service; or deletes it according to the second instruction information. the first QoS flow of the first MBS session and adds the second QoS flow in the first MBS session.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括接入网设备和核心网设备。其中,接入网设备生成第三指示信息,并向核心网设备发送所述第三指示信息。相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第三指示信息,并根据第三指示信息获取MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值。核心网设备发送第一数据包,该第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于或等于该最大值,和/或,大于或等于该最小值。该第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes access network equipment and core network equipment. Wherein, the access network device generates third indication information and sends the third indication information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the third indication information from the access network device, and obtains the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information. The core network device sends the first data packet, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or is greater than or equal to the minimum value. The first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service.
第十二方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括接入网设备和核心网设备。其中,接入网设备生成第三指示信息,并向核心网设备发送所述第三指示信息。相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第三指示信息,并根据第三指示信息获取MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值。核心网设备发送第一数据包和第二数据包,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS 流的数据包,第二数据包为MBS业务的第二QoS流的数据包。第一QoS流和第二QoS流关联一个MRB。第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和小于或等于最大值;和/或,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和大于或等于最小值。In a twelfth aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes access network equipment and core network equipment. Wherein, the access network device generates third indication information and sends the third indication information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the third indication information from the access network device, and obtains the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information. The core network device sends the first data packet and the second data packet. The first data packet is the first QoS of the MBS service. The second data packet is the data packet of the second QoS flow of the MBS service. The first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with one MRB. The sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to the minimum value.
第十三方面,提供了一种通信装置用于实现各种方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面或第三方面或第六方面或第七方面中的核心网设备,或者核心网设备中包含的装置,比如芯片;或者,所述通信装置可以为第二方面或第四方面或第五方面或第八方面中的接入网设备,或者接入网设备中包含的装置,比如芯片。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。In a thirteenth aspect, a communication device is provided for implementing various methods. The communication device may be the core network equipment in the first aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, or a device included in the core network equipment, such as a chip; or, the communication device may be the second aspect or The access network equipment in the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect, or the device included in the access network equipment, such as a chip. The communication device includes modules, units, or means (means) corresponding to the implementation method. The modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to functions.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。该收发模块,也可以称为收发单元,用以实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In some possible designs, the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. This processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof. The transceiver module, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation manner thereof. The transceiver module can be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
在一些可能的设计中,收发模块包括发送模块和/或接收模块,分别用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送或接收功能。In some possible designs, the transceiver module includes a sending module and/or a receiving module, respectively used to implement the sending or receiving function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementation thereof.
第十四方面,提供一种通信装置,包括:处理器和通信接口;该通信接口,用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信;所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面或第三方面或第六方面或第七方面中的核心网设备,或者核心网设备中包含的装置,比如芯片;或者,所述通信装置可以为第二方面或第四方面或第五方面或第八方面中的接入网设备,或者接入网设备中包含的装置,比如芯片。A fourteenth aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instructions to enable the communication The apparatus performs the method described in any aspect. The communication device may be the core network equipment in the first aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, or a device included in the core network equipment, such as a chip; or, the communication device may be the second aspect or The access network equipment in the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect, or the device included in the access network equipment, such as a chip.
第十五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:至少一个处理器;所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该存储器可以与处理器耦合,或者,该存储器也可以独立于处理器存在,例如,存储器和处理器为两个独立的模块。该存储器可以位于所述通信装置之外,也可以位于所述通信装置之内。该通信装置可以为第一方面或第三方面或第六方面或第七方面中的核心网设备,或者核心网设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统,该装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件;或者,所述通信装置可以为第二方面或第四方面或第五方面或第八方面中的接入网设备,或者接入网设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统,该装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a fifteenth aspect, a communication device is provided, including: at least one processor; the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in a memory, so that the communication device executes the method described in any aspect. The memory may be coupled to the processor, or the memory may exist independently of the processor. For example, the memory and the processor may be two independent modules. The memory may be located outside the communication device or within the communication device. The communication device may be the core network equipment in the first aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect, or a device included in the core network device, such as a chip or a chip system. When the device is a chip system, it may be The chip structure may also include chips and other discrete components; or, the communication device may be the access network equipment in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect, or the access network equipment included in the access network equipment. A device, such as a chip or a system-on-a-chip. When the device is a system-on-a-chip, it may be composed of a chip or may include a chip and other discrete components.
第十六方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得通信装置可以执行任一方面所述的方法。In a sixteenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. Computer programs or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium. When run on a communication device, the communication device can perform the method described in any aspect. .
第十七方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得该通信装置可以执行任一方面所述的方法。A seventeenth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a communication device, enable the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
可以理解的是,第十三方面至第十七方面中任一方面提供的通信装置是芯片时,的发送动作/功能可以理解为输出信息,的接收动作/功能可以理解为输入信息。It can be understood that when the communication device provided in any one of the thirteenth to seventeenth aspects is a chip, the sending action/function can be understood as outputting information, and the receiving action/function can be understood as inputting information.
其中,第十三方面至第十七方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面至第八方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought by any one of the design methods in the thirteenth to seventeenth aspects can be found in the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the first to eighth aspects, and will not be described again here.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请提供的一种COUNT的结构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a COUNT provided by this application;
图2为本申请提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图; Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by this application;
图3为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by this application;
图4为本申请提供的一种MBS业务的传输路径示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of the transmission path of an MBS service provided by this application;
图5为本申请提供的一种用户面协议栈的结构示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a user plane protocol stack provided by this application;
图6为本申请提供的一种PDCP PDU的结构示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a PDCP PDU provided by this application;
图7为本申请提供的一种RX_DELIV的计算示例图;Figure 7 is a calculation example diagram of RX_DELIV provided by this application;
图8为本申请提供的一种根据MBS QFI SN确定COUNT值的示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic diagram for determining the COUNT value based on MBS QFI SN provided by this application;
图9为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by this application;
图10为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by this application;
图11为本申请提供的又一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by this application;
图12为本申请提供的再一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 12 is a schematic flow chart of yet another communication method provided by this application;
图13a为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图一;Figure 13a is a schematic diagram of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图13b为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图二;Figure 13b is a schematic diagram 2 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图13c为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图三;Figure 13c is a schematic diagram 3 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图13d为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图四;Figure 13d is a schematic diagram 4 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图14为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图五;Figure 14 is a schematic diagram 5 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图15a为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图六;Figure 15a is a schematic diagram 6 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图15b为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图七;Figure 15b is a schematic diagram 7 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图16a为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图八;Figure 16a is a schematic diagram 8 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图16b为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图九;Figure 16b is a schematic diagram 9 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图17a为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图十;Figure 17a is a schematic diagram 10 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图17b为本申请提供的一种MRB的释放与新建的位置示意图十一;Figure 17b is a schematic diagram 11 of the release and new location of an MRB provided by this application;
图18为本申请提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图;Figure 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided by this application;
图19为本申请提供的一种核心网设备的结构示意图。Figure 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a core network device provided by this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。In the description of this application, unless otherwise stated, "/" means that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. For example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this application only means It is an association relationship that describes associated objects. It means that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. Among them, A and B Can be singular or plural.
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the description of this application, unless otherwise stated, "plurality" means two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。In addition, in order to facilitate a clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish identical or similar items with basically the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the number and execution order.
在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。 In the embodiments of this application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described as "exemplary" or "such as" in the embodiments of the present application is not to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "such as" is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner that is easier to understand.
可以理解,说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各个实施例未必指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。可以理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It will be understood that reference throughout this specification to "an embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic associated with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, various embodiments are not necessarily referred to the same embodiment throughout this specification. Furthermore, the particular features, structures or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It can be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of each process does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be determined by the execution order of the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes no limitation.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征,在某些场景下,可以不依赖于其他特征,比如其当前所基于的方案,而独立实施,解决相应的技术问题,达到相应的效果,也可以在某些场景下,依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的,本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能,在此不予赘述。It can be understood that some optional features in the embodiments of the present application, in certain scenarios, can be implemented independently without relying on other features, such as the solutions they are currently based on, to solve corresponding technical problems and achieve corresponding effects. , and can also be combined with other features according to needs in certain scenarios. Correspondingly, the devices provided in the embodiments of the present application can also implement these features or functions, which will not be described again here.
本申请中,除特殊说明外,各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between various embodiments may be referred to each other. In the various embodiments of this application, if there are no special instructions or logical conflicts, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referenced to each other. Different embodiments can be combined to form new ones according to their inherent logical relationships. Embodiments. The embodiments of the present application described below do not constitute a limitation on the protection scope of the present application.
本申请提供的技术方案可用于各种通信系统,该通信系统可以为第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)通信系统,例如,第四代(4th generation,4G)长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、第五代(5th generation,5G)新无线(new radio,NR)系统、车联网(vehicle to everything,V2X)系统、LTE和NR混合组网的系统、或者设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)系统、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信系统、物联网(Internet of Things,IoT),以及其他下一代通信系统等。或者,该通信系统也可以为非3GPP通信系统,不予限制。The technical solution provided by this application can be used in various communication systems. The communication system can be a third generation partnership project (3GPP) communication system, for example, the fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) long-term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) new radio (NR) system, vehicle to everything (V2X) system, LTE and NR hybrid networking system, or device-to-device (device-to-device, D2D) system, machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M) communication system, Internet of Things (IoT), and other next-generation communication systems, etc. Alternatively, the communication system may also be a non-3GPP communication system, without limitation.
其中,上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明,适用本申请的通信系统不限于此,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。Among them, the above-mentioned communication systems applicable to the present application are only examples. The communication systems applicable to the present application are not limited to these and will be explained uniformly here, and will not be described in detail below.
参见图2,为本申请实提供的一种示例性的通信系统。该通信系统包括核心网设备201和至少一个接入网设备202。进一步的,还可以包括至少一个终端设备203。Referring to Figure 2, an exemplary communication system is provided in this application. The communication system includes a core network device 201 and at least one access network device 202. Further, at least one terminal device 203 may also be included.
可选的,该通信系统包括多个接入网设备202时,该多个接入网设备202均可以通过核心网设备203接收MBS业务的数据包。Optionally, when the communication system includes multiple access network devices 202, each of the multiple access network devices 202 can receive MBS service data packets through the core network device 203.
可选的,核心网设备201主要用于数据报文的分组路由和转发、数据包检查和用户面的部分策略规则实施、用户面的QoS处理等。示例性的,在5G通信系统中,核心网设备201可以为用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元,或组播/广播用户面功能(multicast/broadcast user plane function,MB-UPF)网元。Optionally, the core network device 201 is mainly used for packet routing and forwarding of data packets, data packet inspection, implementation of some policy rules on the user plane, QoS processing on the user plane, etc. For example, in the 5G communication system, the core network device 201 may be a user plane function (UPF) network element or a multicast/broadcast user plane function (MB-UPF) network. Yuan.
可选的,接入网设备202是一种将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备,可以是LTE或演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),如传统的宏基站eNB和异构网络场景下的微基站eNB;或者可以是5G系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNodeB或gNB);或者可以是传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP);或者可以是未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的基站;或者可以是宽带网络业务网关(broadband network gateway,BNG)、汇聚交换机或非3GPP接入设备;或者可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)中的无线控制器;或者可以是WiFi系统中的接入节点(access point,AP);或者可以是无线中继节点或无线回传节点;或者可以是IoT中实现基站功能的设备、V2X中实现基站功能的设备、D2D中实现基站功能的设备、或者M2M中实现基站功能的设备,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。 Optionally, the access network device 202 is a device that connects terminal devices to a wireless network, and may be an evolutionary base station (evolutional Node B) in LTE or an evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A). eNB or eNodeB), such as traditional macro base station eNB and micro base station eNB in heterogeneous network scenarios; or it can be the next generation node B (next generation node B, gNodeB or gNB) in the 5G system; or it can be a transmission receiving point (transmission reception point, TRP); or it can be a base station in the future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN); or it can be a broadband network service gateway (broadband network gateway, BNG), aggregation switch or non-3GPP Access device; or it can be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN); or it can be an access point (AP) in a WiFi system; or it can be a wireless relay node Or a wireless backhaul node; or it can be a device that implements the base station function in IoT, a device that implements the base station function in V2X, a device that implements the base station function in D2D, or a device that implements the base station function in M2M. This is not specified in the embodiments of this application. limited.
示例性的,本申请实施例中的基站可以包括各种形式的基站,例如:宏基站,微基站(也称为小站),中继站,接入点等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。For example, the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include various forms of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application. .
可选的,在具体实现时,接入网设备202可以指集中单元(central unit,CU),或者,接入网设备可以是CU和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)组成的。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分。例如,无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)协议层、业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层以及分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能设置在CU中,而无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层,媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层,物理(physical,PHY)层的功能设置在DU中。Optionally, during specific implementation, the access network device 202 may refer to a centralized unit (central unit, CU), or the access network device may be composed of a CU and a distributed unit (DU). CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the radio resource control (RRC) protocol layer, service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer are set in the CU. The functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer are set in the DU.
可以理解,对CU和DU处理功能按照这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,也可以按照其他的方式进行划分,本申请对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that the division of CU and DU processing functions according to this protocol layer is only an example, and can also be divided in other ways, which is not specifically limited in this application.
在一些实施例中,CU可以由CU控制面(CU control plane,CU-CP)和CU用户面(CU user plane,CU-UP)组成。In some embodiments, a CU may be composed of a CU control plane (CU control plane, CU-CP) and a CU user plane (CU user plane, CU-UP).
可选的,终端设备203可以是指一种具有无线收发功能的设备。终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站(mobile station,MS)、远方站、远程终端、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。终端例如可以是IoT、V2X、D2D、M2M、5G网络、或者未来演进的PLMN中的无线终端。终端设备203可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。Optionally, the terminal device 203 may refer to a device with a wireless transceiver function. Terminal equipment can also be called user equipment (UE), terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station (MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile terminal (MT) , user terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device, etc. The terminal may be, for example, a wireless terminal in an IoT, V2X, D2D, M2M, 5G network, or a future evolved PLMN. The terminal device 203 can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons, satellites, etc.).
示例性的,终端设备203可以是无人机、IoT设备(例如,传感器,电表,水表等)、V2X设备、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)中的站点(station,ST)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(也可以称为穿戴式智能设备)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有车对车(vehicle-to-vehicle,V2V)通信能力的车辆、智能网联车、具有无人机对无人机(UAV to UAV,U2U)通信能力的无人机等等。终端可以是移动的,也可以是固定的,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the terminal device 203 may be a drone, an IoT device (for example, a sensor, an electric meter, a water meter, etc.), a V2X device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), or a cellular phone. , cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistant (PDA) devices, handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing Equipment or other processing equipment connected to a wireless modem, vehicle-mounted equipment, wearable devices (also known as wearable smart devices), tablets or computers with wireless transceiver functions, virtual reality (VR) terminals, industrial controls Wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, and transportation safety Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, vehicle-mounted terminals, vehicles with vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication capabilities, intelligent network connections Vehicles, drones with UAV to UAV (U2U) communication capabilities, etc. The terminal may be mobile or fixed, which is not specifically limited in this application.
可选的,具体实现时,图2所示的终端设备、接入网设备、或核心网设备可以采用图3所示的组成结构,或者包括图3所示的部件。图3为本申请提供的一种通信装置300的组成示意图,该通信装置300可以为终端设备或者终端设备中的芯片或者片上系统;或者,可以为接入网设备或者接入网设备中的模块或芯片或片上系统;或者,可以为核心网设备或者核心网设备中的模块或芯片或片上系统。Optionally, during specific implementation, the terminal equipment, access network equipment, or core network equipment shown in Figure 2 can adopt the composition structure shown in Figure 3, or include the components shown in Figure 3. Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 300 provided by this application. The communication device 300 can be a terminal device or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal device; or it can be an access network device or a module in the access network device. Or a chip or a system on a chip; or, it can be a core network device or a module or a chip or a system on a chip in the core network device.
如图3所示,该通信装置300包括至少一个处理器301,以及至少一个通信接口(图3中仅是示例性的以包括一个通信接口304,以及一个处理器301为例进行说明)。可选的,该通信装置300还可以包括通信总线302和存储器303。As shown in FIG. 3 , the communication device 300 includes at least one processor 301 and at least one communication interface (FIG. 3 is only an example of including a communication interface 304 and a processor 301 for illustration). Optionally, the communication device 300 may also include a communication bus 302 and a memory 303.
处理器301可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、通用处理器、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理器(digital signal processing,DSP)、微处 理器、微控制器、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或它们的任意组合。处理器301还可以是其它具有处理功能的装置,例如电路、器件或软件模块,不予限制。The processor 301 may be a general central processing unit (CPU), general processor, network processor (NP), digital signal processing (DSP), microprocessor processor, microcontroller, programmable logic device (PLD) or any combination thereof. The processor 301 can also be other devices with processing functions, such as circuits, devices or software modules, without limitation.
通信总线302用于连接通信装置300中的不同组件,使得不同组件可以通信。通信总线302可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。该总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图3中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The communication bus 302 is used to connect different components in the communication device 300 so that different components can communicate. The communication bus 302 may be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 3, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
通信接口304,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。示例性的,通信接口304可以模块、电路、收发器或者任何能够实现通信的装置。可选的,所述通信接口304也可以是位于处理器301内的输入输出接口,用以实现处理器的信号输入和信号输出。Communication interface 304 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks. For example, the communication interface 304 may be a module, a circuit, a transceiver, or any device capable of realizing communication. Optionally, the communication interface 304 may also be an input and output interface located within the processor 301 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
存储器303,可以是具有存储功能的装置,用于存储指令和/或数据。其中,指令可以是计算机程序。Memory 303 may be a device with a storage function, used to store instructions and/or data. Wherein, the instructions may be computer programs.
示例性的,存储器303可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和/或指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,也可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和/或指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,还可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或其他磁存储设备等,不予限制。Exemplarily, the memory 303 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or may be a random access memory (RAM). or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and/or instructions, and can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, etc., are not restricted.
需要指出的是,存储器303可以独立于处理器301存在,也可以和处理器301集成在一起。存储器303可以位于通信装置300内,也可以位于通信装置300外,不予限制。处理器301,可以用于执行存储器303中存储的指令,以实现本申请下述实施例提供的方法。It should be noted that the memory 303 may exist independently of the processor 301 or may be integrated with the processor 301 . The memory 303 may be located inside the communication device 300 or outside the communication device 300, without limitation. The processor 301 can be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 303 to implement the methods provided by the following embodiments of the application.
作为一种可选的实现方式,通信装置300还可以包括输出设备305和输入设备306。输出设备305和处理器301通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备305可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二极管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备306和处理器301通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备306可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。As an optional implementation manner, the communication device 300 may also include an output device 305 and an input device 306. Output device 305 communicates with processor 301 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 305 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector), etc. Input device 306 communicates with processor 301 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 306 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensing device, or the like.
需要说明的是,图3所示的结构并不构成对接入网设备、核心网设备、或终端设备的具体限定。比如,在本申请另一些实施例中,接入网设备、核心网设备、或终端设备可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It should be noted that the structure shown in Figure 3 does not constitute a specific limitation on access network equipment, core network equipment, or terminal equipment. For example, in other embodiments of the present application, access network equipment, core network equipment, or terminal equipment may include more or less components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, or some components may be separated, or Different component arrangements. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案,首先给出本申请相关技术的简要介绍如下。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, a brief introduction to the relevant technologies of the present application is first provided as follows.
1、广播多播业务(multicast and broadcast service,MBS):1. Broadcast and multicast service (multicast and broadcast service, MBS):
MBS是面向多个终端设备的业务,常见的MBS包括直播业务、公共安全业务、批量软件更新业务等。如图4所示,MBS的传输路径可以为:数据服务器(或称为MBS服务器)→核心网设备→接入网设备→多个终端设备。MBS is a service for multiple terminal devices. Common MBS include live broadcast services, public safety services, batch software update services, etc. As shown in Figure 4, the transmission path of MBS can be: data server (or MBS server) → core network equipment → access network equipment → multiple terminal devices.
其中,核心网设备向接入网设备发送MBS业务时,业务数据通过MBS会话(session)传输,MBS会话包括至少一个MBS服务质量(quality of service,QoS)流。接入网设备向终端设备发送MBS业务时,业务数据通过MBS无线承载(MBS radio bear,MRB)传输,一个MRB可以关联一个或多个QoS流。对于一个MRB,可以采用点到多点(point to multi-point,PTM)或点到点(point to point,PTP)的传输方式。 When the core network device sends the MBS service to the access network device, the service data is transmitted through an MBS session, and the MBS session includes at least one MBS quality of service (QoS) flow. When the access network device sends the MBS service to the terminal device, the service data is transmitted through the MBS radio bear (MBS radio bear, MRB). One MRB can be associated with one or more QoS flows. For an MRB, point-to-multipoint (PTM) or point-to-point (PTP) transmission can be used.
2、无线接入网侧协议栈:2. Wireless access network side protocol stack:
无线接入网侧的协议栈可以分为用户面协议栈和控制面协议栈。用户面协议栈可以包括业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层等。其中,物理层属于第一层(也称为层一(layer 1,L1)),MAC层、RLC层、PDCP层、以及SDAP层属于第二层(也称为层二(layer 2,L2))。此外,控制面的无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层属于第三层(也称为层三(layer 3,L3))。The protocol stack on the wireless access network side can be divided into a user plane protocol stack and a control plane protocol stack. The user plane protocol stack can include a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a media interface layer. Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical (physical, PHY) layer, etc. Among them, the physical layer belongs to the first layer (also called layer 1 (L1)), and the MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer, and SDAP layer belong to the second layer (also called layer 2 (L2) ). In addition, the radio resource control (RRC) layer of the control plane belongs to the third layer (also called layer 3 (L3)).
如图5所示,MBS的用户面协议栈中,SDAP层位于PDCP层之上,PDCP层位于RLC层之上,RLC层位于MAC层之上,MAC层位于物理层之上。对于MBS业务,数据到达接入网设备后,各个协议层按照图5所示的由上到下的顺序依次对数据包进行处理,最终通过空口向终端设备传输。终端设备在空口接收到数据包后,按照与接入网设备相反的顺序依次对数据包进行相应的处理。其中,各个协议层对数据包的处理由该协议层对应的多功能实体实现,例如,PDCP层的处理由相应的PDCP层实体实现。As shown in Figure 5, in the user plane protocol stack of MBS, the SDAP layer is located above the PDCP layer, the PDCP layer is located above the RLC layer, the RLC layer is located above the MAC layer, and the MAC layer is located above the physical layer. For the MBS service, after the data reaches the access network device, each protocol layer processes the data packets in sequence from top to bottom as shown in Figure 5, and finally transmits them to the terminal device through the air interface. After receiving the data packet at the air interface, the terminal device processes the data packet accordingly in the reverse order of the access network device. Among them, the processing of data packets by each protocol layer is implemented by the multi-functional entity corresponding to the protocol layer. For example, the processing of the PDCP layer is implemented by the corresponding PDCP layer entity.
通常,层二提供的在终端设备和接入网设备之间传输用户数据的服务可以称为无线承载(radio bearer,RB)。对于MBS业务,层二提供的在终端设备和接入网设备之间传输用户数据的服务可以称为MRB。示例性的,该在终端设备和接入网设备之间传输用户数据的服务可以由上述属于层二的各个协议层实现。Generally, the service provided by Layer 2 to transmit user data between terminal equipment and access network equipment can be called a radio bearer (RB). For MBS services, the service provided by Layer 2 to transmit user data between terminal equipment and access network equipment can be called MRB. For example, the service of transmitting user data between the terminal device and the access network device can be implemented by each protocol layer belonging to layer 2 mentioned above.
需要说明的是,上述图5所示的用户面协议栈对本申请的方案不构成任何限定。在实际应用中,用户面协议栈可以包括比图示更多或更少的协议层。It should be noted that the user plane protocol stack shown in Figure 5 does not constitute any limitation on the solution of this application. In actual applications, the user plane protocol stack may include more or fewer protocol layers than shown.
3、PDCP层:3. PDCP layer:
PDCP层主要用于处理控制面的RRC消息,以及用户面的互联网协议(internet protocol,IP)包。主要实现以下功能:The PDCP layer is mainly used to process RRC messages on the control plane and Internet Protocol (IP) packets on the user plane. Mainly implements the following functions:
a)安全性功能,例如数据的加密/解密、完整性保护/校验;a) Security functions, such as data encryption/decryption, integrity protection/verification;
b)IP报头的压缩/解压缩;b)Compression/decompression of IP header;
c)丢弃超时的用户面数据包;c) Discard timed-out user plane data packets;
d)用户面数据包的重排序和重传等。d) Reordering and retransmission of user plane data packets, etc.
PDCP层的协议数据单元(packet data unit,PDU)由PDCP层的服务数据单元(service data unit,SDU)和PDCP头(header)组成。此外,PDCP层的PDU分为数据PDU(即Data PDU)和控制PDU(即Control PDU)。数据PDU可以包括用户面数据和控制面数据;控制PDU可以包括PDCP状态报告和鲁棒性头压缩(robust header compression,ROHC)反馈。The protocol data unit (packet data unit, PDU) of the PDCP layer is composed of the service data unit (SDU) of the PDCP layer and the PDCP header. In addition, the PDU at the PDCP layer is divided into data PDU (Data PDU) and control PDU (Control PDU). Data PDU can include user plane data and control plane data; control PDU can include PDCP status report and robust header compression (ROHC) feedback.
其中,PDCP Data PDU(或SDU)由COUNT值标识,COUNT值由高位的超帧号(hyper frame number,HFN)和低位的PDCP序列号(sequence number,SN)组成。通常,发送端向接收端发送的PDCP PDU包括PDCP SN。接收侧可以根据该PDCP SN推算HFN,从而确定该PDCP PDU的COUNT值。COUNT值的长度通常为32比特(bit)。PDCP SN的长度为12bit或18比特。HFN的长度为32-PDCP SN的大小。Among them, PDCP Data PDU (or SDU) is identified by the COUNT value, which consists of the high-order super frame number (HFN) and the low-order PDCP sequence number (SN). Usually, the PDCP PDU sent by the sender to the receiver includes PDCP SN. The receiving side can calculate the HFN based on the PDCP SN to determine the COUNT value of the PDCP PDU. The length of the COUNT value is usually 32 bits. The length of PDCP SN is 12 bits or 18 bits. The length of the HFN is 32-PDCP SN size.
示例性的,如图6所示,以PDCP SN的大小为12比特为例,示出了一种PDCP PDU的格式。其中,R字段表示预留字段,可设置为0。PDCP SN字段用于承载PDCP SN,cont.表示续(continue),数据(Data)字段用于承载数据,长度可变。完整性消息认证码(message authentication code for integrity,MAC-I)字段用于承载完整性保护产生的数字签名。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 6, taking the size of the PDCP SN as 12 bits as an example, a PDCP PDU format is shown. Among them, the R field represents a reserved field and can be set to 0. The PDCP SN field is used to carry PDCP SN, cont. means continue, and the data field is used to carry data with variable length. The message authentication code for integrity (MAC-I) field is used to carry the digital signature generated by integrity protection.
其中,COUNT值是由接入网设备生成的。存在多个MRB时,接入网设备可以为该多个 MRB中的每个MRB分别维护COUNT值。例如,以COUNT值的长度等于32比特为例,存在两个MRB时,MRB#1的数据包的COUNT的范围可以为0~232-1,MRB#2的数据包的COUNT值的范围同样为0~232-1。Among them, the COUNT value is generated by the access network device. When there are multiple MRBs, the access network equipment can be Each MRB in the MRB maintains a COUNT value separately. For example, assuming that the length of the COUNT value is equal to 32 bits, when there are two MRBs, the COUNT value of the data packet of MRB#1 can range from 0 to 2 32 -1, and the COUNT value of the data packet of MRB#2 has the same range. It is 0~2 32 -1.
需要说明的是,本申请中的“COUNT值”也可以称为(或描述为)“COUNT”,二者可以相互替换。It should be noted that the “COUNT value” in this application can also be called (or described as) “COUNT”, and the two can be replaced with each other.
在用户面的PDCP层数据传输中,发送PDCP实体维护状态变量TX_NEXT,该状态变量指示下一个传输的PDCP SDU的COUNT值,初始值为0。In the PDCP layer data transmission on the user plane, the sending PDCP entity maintains the state variable TX_NEXT. This state variable indicates the COUNT value of the next transmitted PDCP SDU. The initial value is 0.
接收PDCP实体维护以下状态变量:The receiving PDCP entity maintains the following state variables:
RX_NEXT:该状态变量指示下一个期望接收的PDCP SDU的COUNT值,初始值为0。RX_NEXT: This status variable indicates the COUNT value of the next PDCP SDU expected to be received. The initial value is 0.
RX_DELIV:该状态变量指示还没有递交上层但等待递交的第一个(first)PDCP SDU的COUNT值,初始值为0。RX_DELIV: This status variable indicates the COUNT value of the first (first) PDCP SDU that has not been submitted to the upper layer but is waiting to be submitted. The initial value is 0.
RX_RECORD:该状态变量指示触发重排序(t-reordering)定时器(timer)的PDCP Data PDU的COUNT值加1。RX_RECORD: This status variable indicates that the COUNT value of the PDCP Data PDU that triggers the reordering (t-reordering) timer (timer) is increased by 1.
接收PDCP实体在收到PDCP PDU后,首先基于PDCP PDU头中的PDCP SN以及当前的状态变量确定该PDCP PDU的HFN以及COUNT值。后续可以基于该COUNT值进行解密和完整性验证,并更新状态变量。After receiving the PDCP PDU, the receiving PDCP entity first determines the HFN and COUNT values of the PDCP PDU based on the PDCP SN in the PDCP PDU header and the current state variable. Subsequent decryption and integrity verification can be performed based on the COUNT value, and the status variable can be updated.
示例性的,接收PDCP实体可以根据如下方法确定PDCP PDU的HFN:For example, the receiving PDCP entity can determine the HFN of the PDCP PDU according to the following method:
如果RCVD_SN<SN(RX_DELIV)-Window_Size:
RCVD_HFN=HFN(RX_DELIV)+1。
If RCVD_SN<SN(RX_DELIV)-Window_Size:
RCVD_HFN=HFN(RX_DELIV)+1.
否则,如果RCVD_SN>=SN(RX_DELIV)+Window_Size:
RCVD_HFN=HFN(RX_DELIV)-1。
Otherwise, if RCVD_SN>=SN(RX_DELIV)+Window_Size:
RCVD_HFN=HFN(RX_DELIV)-1.
否则(即RCVD_SN大于等于SN(RX_DELIV)-Window_Size,且小于SN(RX_DELIV)+Window_Size):
RCVD_HFN=HFN(RX_DELIV);
RCVD_COUNT=[RCVD_HFN,RCVD_SN]。
Otherwise (that is, RCVD_SN is greater than or equal to SN(RX_DELIV)-Window_Size, and less than SN(RX_DELIV)+Window_Size):
RCVD_HFN=HFN(RX_DELIV);
RCVD_COUNT=[RCVD_HFN, RCVD_SN].
其中,RCVD_COUNT表示COUNT值,[RCVD_HFN,RCVD_SN]中的RCVD_HFN表示COUNT值的HFN,RCVD_SN表示COUNT值的PDCP SN。Among them, RCVD_COUNT represents the COUNT value, RCVD_HFN in [RCVD_HFN, RCVD_SN] represents the HFN of the COUNT value, and RCVD_SN represents the PDCP SN of the COUNT value.
即,本申请中的COUNT值可以表示为[HFN,PDCP SN]的形式,例如,[X1,X2]表示COUNT值的HFN等于X1,PDCP SN等于X2That is, the COUNT value in this application can be expressed in the form of [HFN, PDCP SN]. For example, [X 1 , X 2 ] indicates that the HFN of the COUNT value is equal to X 1 and the PDCP SN is equal to X 2 .
以上各参数中:Among the above parameters:
HFN(状态变量):表示状态变量的HFN部分;HFN (state variable): represents the HFN part of the state variable;
SN(状态变量):表示状态变量的SN部分;SN (state variable): represents the SN part of the state variable;
RCVD_SN:表示接收到的PDCP Data PDU的PDCP SN,包括在PDU头中;RCVD_SN: Indicates the PDCP SN of the received PDCP Data PDU, included in the PDU header;
RCVD_HFN:表示接收PDCP实体计算的接收到的PDCP Data PDU的HFN;RCVD_HFN: Indicates the HFN of the received PDCP Data PDU calculated by the receiving PDCP entity;
RCVD_COUNT:表示接收到的PDCP Data PDU的COUNT=[RCVD_HFN,RCVD_SN];RCVD_COUNT: Indicates the COUNT of the received PDCP Data PDU = [RCVD_HFN, RCVD_SN];
Window_Size:表示(重排序)窗口大小,其取值为2PDCP-SN-Size-1Window_Size: Indicates the (reordering) window size, its value is 2 PDCP-SN-Size-1 ;
RX_DELIV为状态变量。SN(RX_DELIV)表示RX_DELIV的SN部分,HFN(RX_DELIV)表示RX_DELIV的HFN部分。RX_DELIV is a status variable. SN(RX_DELIV) represents the SN part of RX_DELIV, and HFN(RX_DELIV) represents the HFN part of RX_DELIV.
在单播业务中,终端设备和接入网设备开始通信时HFN=0,后续接收方根据上述算法计算接收到的PDCP PDU的HFN以及COUNT值。由于单播业务中,接入网设备开始向终端设备发送数据时,终端设备即开始接收数据,因此,终端设备和接入网设备的HFN始终是对 齐的。In the unicast service, when the terminal device and the access network device start communicating, HFN=0, and the subsequent receiver calculates the HFN and COUNT values of the received PDCP PDU according to the above algorithm. Since in unicast services, when the access network device starts sending data to the terminal device, the terminal device starts to receive data. Therefore, the HFN of the terminal device and the access network device is always the same. Qi.
然而,在MBS业务中,可能出现以下情况:某个接入网设备发送MBS业务一段时间后,某个终端设备接入该接入网设备接收该MBS业务。此时,接入网设备侧的HFN可能不为0。若终端设备仍然按照单播技术,将HFN的初始值设置为0,那么将导致接入网设备和终端设备的HFN对不齐,或者说HFN失步(或失去同步)。However, in the MBS service, the following situation may occur: after a certain access network device sends the MBS service for a period of time, a terminal device accesses the access network device to receive the MBS service. At this time, the HFN on the access network device side may not be 0. If the terminal equipment still follows the unicast technology and sets the initial value of HFN to 0, it will cause the HFN of the access network equipment and the terminal equipment to be misaligned, or the HFN will be out of sync (or out of synchronization).
为了解决MBS业务中,接入网设备和终端设备之间的HFN失步的问题,目前提出了下述方案:In order to solve the problem of HFN out-of-synchronization between access network equipment and terminal equipment in MBS services, the following solutions are currently proposed:
接入网设备向终端设备发送参考的HFN和PDCP SN,以便终端设备计算该终端设备收到的第一个MBS数据包的HFN,从而使得接入网设备和终端设备之间的HFN对齐;The access network device sends the reference HFN and PDCP SN to the terminal device so that the terminal device can calculate the HFN of the first MBS data packet received by the terminal device, thereby aligning the HFN between the access network device and the terminal device;
对于MRB,RX_NEXT的PDCP SN的初值设置为(x+1)mod2PDCP-SN-SizeFor MRB, the initial value of PDCP SN of RX_NEXT is set to (x+1)mod2 PDCP-SN-Size ;
对于MRB,RX_DELIV的PDCP SN的初值设置为(x-0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1)mod 2PDCP-SN-SizeFor MRB, the initial value of PDCP SN of RX_DELIV is set to (x-0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 ) mod 2 PDCP-SN-Size .
其中,x表示终端设备收到的第一个PDCP PDU的PDCP SN的值。RX_DELIV的COUNT初值可以通过终端设备收到的第一个PDCP PDU的COUNT值和(重排序)窗口大小(即Window_Size)得到,例如,从RX_DELIV的COUNT初值到终端设备收到的第一个PDCP PDU的COUNT值,共包括0.5*Window_Size个COUNT值。Among them, x represents the value of PDCP SN of the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device. The initial COUNT value of RX_DELIV can be obtained from the COUNT value of the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device and the (reordered) window size (i.e. Window_Size). For example, from the initial COUNT value of RX_DELIV to the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device The COUNT value of PDCP PDU includes a total of 0.5*Window_Size COUNT values.
基于该方案,当终端设备收到的第一个MBS数据包的COUNT值较小(小于0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1)时,会使得RX_DELIV的初值的HFN部分为负值,比如-1。Based on this solution, when the COUNT value of the first MBS data packet received by the terminal device is small (less than 0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 ), the HFN part of the initial value of RX_DELIV will be negative. , such as -1.
示例性的,假设PDCP SN的长度为12比特,那么PDCP SN的范围为0~212-1=0~4095,PDCP(重排序)窗口的大小为212-1=2048,所述窗口大小的一半等于0.5*212-1=1024。如图7所示,假设终端设备接收到的第一个PDCP PDU的PDCP SN=500,HFN=0,那么RX_NEXT=501。根据HFN=0,PDCP SN=500的COUNT值和所述窗口大小的一半(即1024)得到的RX_DELIV为负。其中,RX_DELIV的HFN=-1,PDCP SN=3571。For example, assuming that the length of the PDCP SN is 12 bits, the range of the PDCP SN is 0~2 12 -1=0~4095, and the size of the PDCP (reordering) window is 2 12-1 =2048. The window size Half of is equal to 0.5*2 12-1 = 1024. As shown in Figure 7, assuming that the PDCP SN=500 and HFN=0 of the first PDCP PDU received by the terminal device, then RX_NEXT=501. Based on a COUNT value of HFN=0, PDCP SN=500 and half the window size (i.e. 1024) the resulting RX_DELIV is negative. Among them, HFN of RX_DELIV=-1 and PDCP SN=3571.
为了避免出现RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,一种可行的实现方式为:接入网设备在PDCP PDU的初始HFN的基础上加1,得到该PDCP PDU的最终HFN。基于该实现方式,MBS业务的所有PDCP PDU的HFN都等于初始HFN加1。此时,接入网设备侧不存在HFN=0且PDCP SN小于0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1的PDCP PDU,RX_DELIV的HFN的初值也不会为负数。其中,PDCP PDU的初始HFN可以根据MBS服务质量流标识(QoS flow identifier,QFI)SN(即MBS QFI SN)生成。In order to avoid the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV being negative, a feasible implementation method is: the access network device adds 1 to the initial HFN of the PDCP PDU to obtain the final HFN of the PDCP PDU. Based on this implementation, the HFN of all PDCP PDUs of the MBS service is equal to the initial HFN plus 1. At this time, there is no PDCP PDU with HFN=0 and PDCP SN less than 0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 on the access network device side, and the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV will not be a negative number. The initial HFN of the PDCP PDU may be generated based on the MBS quality of service flow identifier (QoS flow identifier, QFI) SN (ie, MBS QFI SN).
对于MBS业务,可能会有多个接入网设备传输同一MBS业务的数据,为了保证终端设备的切换,不同接入网设备对于同一数据包需要生成相同的COUNT值。例如,不同接入网设备可以基于数据包的MBS QFI SN生成该数据包的COUNT值。For MBS services, there may be multiple access network devices transmitting data for the same MBS service. In order to ensure switching of terminal devices, different access network devices need to generate the same COUNT value for the same data packet. For example, different access network devices can generate the COUNT value of the data packet based on the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
其中,数据包的MBS QFI SN是由核心网设备生成的。在MBS会话包括多个QoS流时,核心网设备为该多个QoS流中的每个QoS流分别维护MBS QFI SN。例如,存在两个QoS流时,QoS流1的数据包的MBS QFI SN的范围可以为0~2MBS-QFI-SN-Size-1,QoS流2的数据包的MBS QFI SN的范围同样为0~2MBS-QFI-SN-Size-1。其中,MBS-QFI-SN-Size表示MBS QFI SN的长度,该长度可以和COUNT值的长度相同,例如为32bit,以便接入网设备参考MBS QFI SN生成COUNT值。示例性的,接入网设备可以按照如下方式生成COUNT值:Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is generated by the core network equipment. When the MBS session includes multiple QoS flows, the core network device maintains the MBS QFI SN for each QoS flow in the multiple QoS flows. For example, when there are two QoS flows, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of QoS flow 1 can range from 0 to 2 MBS-QFI-SN-Size -1, and the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of QoS flow 2 can also range from 0 to 2 MBS-QFI-SN-Size -1. 0~2MBS -QFI-SN-Size -1. Among them, MBS-QFI-SN-Size represents the length of the MBS QFI SN. The length can be the same as the length of the COUNT value, for example, 32 bits, so that the access network device can refer to the MBS QFI SN to generate the COUNT value. For example, the access network device can generate the COUNT value as follows:
当MRB和QoS流之间是一对一的关系时,接入网设备可以截取MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特作为COUNT值的HFN,N-K个低位比特作为COUNT值的PDCP SN。其中,K为HFN的长度,N为MBS QFI SN的长度。也就是说,接入网设备可以设置COUNT值等于MBS QFI SN。当然,为了避免RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,接入网设备可以在MBS  QFI SN的K个高位比特的基础上加某个常数,作为COUNT值的HFN。其中,该常数大于或等于1。When there is a one-to-one relationship between the MRB and the QoS flow, the access network device can intercept the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN as the HFN of the COUNT value, and the NK low-order bits as the PDCP SN of the COUNT value. Among them, K is the length of HFN, and N is the length of MBS QFI SN. In other words, the access network equipment can set the COUNT value equal to the MBS QFI SN. Of course, in order to avoid the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV being negative, the access network equipment can Based on the K high-order bits of QFI SN, a certain constant is added as the HFN of the COUNT value. where the constant is greater than or equal to 1.
当MRB和QoS流之间是一对多的关系时,接入网设备可以根据该MRB对应的所有QoS流的MBS QFI SN生成COUNT值。When there is a one-to-many relationship between an MRB and a QoS flow, the access network device can generate a COUNT value based on the MBS QFI SN of all QoS flows corresponding to the MRB.
示例性的,假设存在QFI分别为1、2、3的3个QoS流,其中,QFI等于1和QFI等于2的QoS流关联MRB#1,QFI等于3的QoS流关联MRB#2。如图8所示,核心网设备发送的数据包包括:QFI等于1的QoS流中QFI SN等于19、20的数据包,QFI等于2的QoS流中QFI SN等于48、49、50、51、52的数据包,以及QFI等于3的QoS流中QFI SN等于95、96、97、98、99、100、101、102、103、104的数据包。For example, assume that there are three QoS flows with QFI equal to 1, 2, and 3 respectively. Among them, the QoS flows with QFI equal to 1 and QFI equal to 2 are associated with MRB#1, and the QoS flows with QFI equal to 3 are associated with MRB#2. As shown in Figure 8, the data packets sent by the core network equipment include: QFI SN equals 19 and 20 in the QoS flow with QFI equal to 1, QFI SN equals 48, 49, 50, 51, and QFI SN in the QoS flow with QFI equal to 2. 52 data packets, and QFI SN equals 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104 data packets in the QoS flow with QFI equal to 3.
对于MRB#2,由于其仅关联QFI等于3的QoS流,因此,接入网设备可以将数据包的QFI SN作为COUNT值。For MRB#2, since it is only associated with QoS flows with QFI equal to 3, the access network device can use the QFI SN of the data packet as the COUNT value.
对于MRB#1,由于其关联QFI等于1和QFI等于2的QoS流,因此,接入网设备可以将两个QoS流的下一个期望收到数据包的QFI SN之和作为下一个收到的数据包的COUNT值。例如,在A时刻,QFI 1的下一个期望收到的数据包的QFI SN为20,QFI 2的下一个期望收到的数据包的QFI SN为50,那么在A时刻后第一个收到的数据包的COUNT值等于70。For MRB#1, since it is associated with QoS flows with QFI equal to 1 and QFI equal to 2, the access network device can regard the sum of the QFI SNs of the next expected received data packets of the two QoS flows as the next received The COUNT value of the packet. For example, at time A, the QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received by QFI 1 is 20, and the QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received by QFI 2 is 50, then the first received data packet after time A The packet's COUNT value is equal to 70.
或者,作为图8中未示出的另一种方式,网络设备可以将已经收到的两个QoS流的最大QFI SN之和作为下一个收到的数据包的COUNT值。例如,在A时刻,收到的QFI 1的最大QFI SN为19,收到的QFI 2的最大QFI SN为49,那么在A时刻后第一个收到的数据包的COUNT值等于68。Or, as another way not shown in Figure 8, the network device can use the sum of the maximum QFI SNs of the two QoS flows that have been received as the COUNT value of the next received data packet. For example, at time A, the maximum QFI SN of QFI 1 received is 19, and the maximum QFI SN of QFI 2 received is 49, then the COUNT value of the first received data packet after time A is equal to 68.
需要说明的是,为了方便画图,图8中将MBS QFI SN简略描述为QFSN。此外,图8中以接入网设备未在MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的基础上加某个常数作为HFN为例进行说明,在实际应用中,也可以在MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的基础上加某个常数以得到最终的HFN。此外,除特殊说明外,本申请中的QFI SN均指MBS QFI SN,可以替换描述为MBS QFI SN。It should be noted that, for the convenience of drawing, MBS QFI SN is briefly described as QFSN in Figure 8. In addition, in Figure 8, the access network equipment does not add a certain constant as HFN on the basis of the K high-order bits of MBS QFI SN as an example. In practical applications, it can also be added to the K high-order bits of MBS QFI SN. Add a certain constant to obtain the final HFN. In addition, unless otherwise specified, the QFI SN in this application refers to MBS QFI SN, which can be replaced by MBS QFI SN.
在综合考虑避免RX_DELIV的初始HFN为负数,以及不同接入网设备对于同一数据包需要生成相同COUNT值的问题时,由于MBS QFI SN和COUNT值的长度相同,当MBS QFI SN的高位比特加某个常数作为COUNT值的HFN时,可能出现COUNT值已经到达上限,而QFI SN还未到达上限的情况。When comprehensively considering the problem of avoiding the initial HFN of RX_DELIV being a negative number and the need for different access network equipment to generate the same COUNT value for the same data packet, since the lengths of the MBS QFI SN and COUNT values are the same, when the high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN are added by a certain When a constant is used as the HFN of the COUNT value, it may happen that the COUNT value has reached the upper limit, but the QFI SN has not yet reached the upper limit.
基于此,本申请提供一种通信方法,对于MBS业务,能够有效防止接入网设备中的COUNT值溢出,从而提高通信可靠性。当然,本申请的方案可以用于解决任何原因导致的COUNT值已经到达上限,而QFI SN还未到达上限的情况。Based on this, this application provides a communication method that can effectively prevent the COUNT value in the access network device from overflowing for the MBS service, thereby improving communication reliability. Of course, the solution of this application can be used to solve the situation where the COUNT value has reached the upper limit due to any reason, but the QFI SN has not yet reached the upper limit.
下面将结合附图,以图2所示的核心网设备201、接入网设备202、以及终端设备203之间的交互为例,对本申请实施例提供的方法进行展开说明。The method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings, taking the interaction between the core network device 201, the access network device 202, and the terminal device 203 shown in Figure 2 as an example.
可以理解的,本申请实施例中,执行主体可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤,这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the execution subject can perform some or all of the steps in the embodiment of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples. The embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, various steps may be performed in a different order than those presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application.
需要说明的是,本申请下述实施例中各个设备之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例,具体实现中也可以是其他的名字,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that in the following embodiments of the present application, the names of the messages between the devices or the names of the parameters in the messages are just examples, and other names may also be used in specific implementations. This is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application. .
示例性的,本申请下述实施例提供的方法可以应用于MBS业务的传输场景下。当然,此处仅是示例性的对本申请的应用场景进行说明,该应用场景对本申请不造成任何限定,本申 请对下述提供的方法的应用场景也不作具体限定。By way of example, the methods provided in the following embodiments of this application can be applied in the transmission scenario of MBS services. Of course, this is only an exemplary description of the application scenarios of the present application, and this application scenario does not impose any limitations on the present application. Please do not limit the application scenarios of the methods provided below.
如图9所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法,该通信方法包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 9, a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application includes the following steps:
S901、核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一数据包。相应的,接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包。S901. The core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
其中,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包。第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值。The first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service. The MBS QFI SN of the first packet is less than the first threshold.
可选的,第一QoS流关联第一MRB。第一QoS流可以为一个QoS流,或者可以包括多个QoS流。在第一QoS流为一个QoS流时,第一MRB和QoS流为一对一的关系;在第一QoS流包括多个QoS流时,第一MRB和QoS流为一对多的关系。此外,在第一QoS流包括多个QoS流时,第一数据包可以为该多个QoS流中的任意一个QoS流的数据包。Optionally, the first QoS flow is associated with the first MRB. The first QoS flow may be one QoS flow, or may include multiple QoS flows. When the first QoS flow is one QoS flow, the first MRB and the QoS flow have a one-to-one relationship; when the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows, the first MRB and the QoS flow have a one-to-many relationship. In addition, when the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows, the first data packet may be a data packet of any one of the multiple QoS flows.
可选的,接入网设备收到第一数据包后,可以通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据包。其中,接入网设备收到的第一数据包和向终端设备发送的第一数据包的载荷(payload)是相同的,但是二者的结构或者数据包头可能不同。例如,接入网设备收到的第一数据包是采用GPRS用户面隧道(GPRS tunnelling protocol for the user plane,GTP-U)协议封装的数据包,而接入网设备向终端设备发送的第一数据包是采用空口协议封装的数据包。其中,GPRS指通用分组无线系统(general packet radio system,GPRS)。Optionally, after receiving the first data packet, the access network device may send the first data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB. Wherein, the payload of the first data packet received by the access network device and the first data packet sent to the terminal device are the same, but the structures or data packet headers of the two may be different. For example, the first data packet received by the access network device is a data packet encapsulated using the GPRS tunneling protocol for the user plane (GTP-U), and the first data packet sent by the access network device to the terminal device is The data packet is a data packet encapsulated using the air interface protocol. Among them, GPRS refers to the general packet radio system (GPRS).
在本申请下述实施例中,为了方便描述,若接入网设备收到的数据包和接入网设备向终端设备发送的数据包的载荷相同,则二者使用同一名称。但是可以理解的是,这两个数据包的结构可能不同。此外,当出现数据包的MBS QFI SN属性时,该数据包通常指接入网设备接收到的数据包,当出现数据包的COUNT值属性时,该数据包通常指接入网设备向终端设备发送的数据包。数据包的COUNT值也可以理解为该数据包的PDCP PDU(或SDU)的COUNT值。In the following embodiments of the present application, for convenience of description, if the payload of the data packet received by the access network device and the data packet sent by the access network device to the terminal device are the same, the same name will be used for both. But it is understood that the structure of these two packets may be different. In addition, when the MBS QFI SN attribute of the data packet appears, the data packet usually refers to the data packet received by the access network device. When the COUNT value attribute of the data packet appears, the data packet usually refers to the data packet sent by the access network device to the terminal device. sent packet. The COUNT value of the data packet can also be understood as the COUNT value of the PDCP PDU (or SDU) of the data packet.
可选的,接入网设备可以根据第一数据包的MBS QFI SN确定第一数据包的COUNT值。其中,为了避免RX_DELIV的初始HFN为负值,接入网设备可以在根据MBS QFI SN推演的HFN的基础上加偏移值,得到第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN,并根据MBS QFI SN推演得到第一数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN。其中,该偏移值为正整数。第一数据包之后的数据包的COUNT值生成方式与第一数据包的COUNT值的生成方式相同。Optionally, the access network device can determine the COUNT value of the first data packet based on the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. Among them, in order to prevent the initial HFN of RX_DELIV from being negative, the access network equipment can add an offset value to the HFN deduced based on MBS QFI SN to obtain the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet, and deduced based on MBS QFI SN Get the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first packet. Among them, the offset value is a positive integer. The COUNT value of the data packets subsequent to the first data packet is generated in the same manner as the COUNT value of the first data packet.
可选的,本申请中的偏移值可以是协议预定义的;或者,可以是接入网设备之间协商的;或者,可以是核心网设备配置的,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the offset value in this application can be predefined by the protocol; or it can be negotiated between access network devices; or it can be configured by the core network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
对于第一阈值,作为一种可能的实现,第一阈值可以为2N-1,其中,N为MBS QFI SN的长度。For the first threshold, as a possible implementation, the first threshold may be 2 N -1, where N is the length of the MBS QFI SN.
本申请实施例中,参数的长度指该参数的比特数。在实际应用中,参数的长度还可以称为参数的大小(size),例如MBS QFI SN的长度也可以称为MBS QFI SN的大小。二者可以相互替换。In the embodiment of this application, the length of a parameter refers to the number of bits of the parameter. In practical applications, the length of a parameter can also be called the size of the parameter. For example, the length of MBS QFI SN can also be called the size of MBS QFI SN. The two are interchangeable.
作为另一种可能的实现,当接入网设备根据数据包的MBS QFI SN和偏移值确定数据包的COUNT值时,第一阈值可以大于或等于COUNT值等于2N-1时对应的MBS QFI SN加1,且小于或等于2N-1。As another possible implementation, when the access network device determines the COUNT value of the data packet based on the MBS QFI SN and offset value of the data packet, the first threshold may be greater than or equal to the corresponding MBS when the COUNT value is equal to 2 N -1 QFI SN increases by 1 and is less than or equal to 2 N -1.
S902、接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息。S902. The access network device sends the first instruction information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the first indication information from the access network device.
其中,第一指示信息用于核心网设备设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包。 The first indication information is used by the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow to be greater than or equal to 0 and smaller than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. The second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
可选的,接入网设备包括CU,CU包括CU-UP和CU-CP时,可以由CU-UP通知CU-CP发送第一指示信息,再由CU-CP向核心网设备发送该第一指示信息。其中,CU-UP向CU-CP发送的信息的内容和CU-CP向核心网设备发送的第一指示信息的内容可以相同,也可以不同。CU-UP向CU-CP发送的信息用于通知CU-CP发送第一指示信息。Optionally, the access network device includes a CU, and when the CU includes a CU-UP and a CU-CP, the CU-UP may notify the CU-CP to send the first indication information, and then the CU-CP may send the first indication information to the core network device. Instructions. The content of the information sent by the CU-UP to the CU-CP and the content of the first instruction information sent by the CU-CP to the core network device may be the same or different. The information sent by the CU-UP to the CU-CP is used to notify the CU-CP to send the first indication information.
可选的,接入网设备可以在下述情况中的任一情况发生时,向核心网设备发送该第一指示信息,或者说,接入网设备可以在下述条件中的任一条件满足时,向核心网设备发送该第一指示信息:Optionally, the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device when any of the following conditions occurs, or in other words, the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device when any of the following conditions are met. Send the first instruction information to the core network device:
1)第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值。1) The maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold.
可选的,该第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值可以理解为:对于第一MRB,接入网设备实际已经使用/分配/占用/发送的COUNT值中的最大值,而不是理论上能够达到的COUNT最大值。Optionally, the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB can be understood as: the maximum value of the COUNT values that the access network device has actually used/allocated/occupied/sent for the first MRB, rather than the maximum value that can theoretically be The maximum value of COUNT reached.
示例性的,在第一QoS流为一个QoS流时,接入网设备收到第一数据包,并根据第一数据包的MBS QFI SN和偏移值确定第一数据包的COUNT值后,该第一数据包的COUNT值即为第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值。For example, when the first QoS flow is a QoS flow, after the access network device receives the first data packet and determines the COUNT value of the first data packet based on the MBS QFI SN and offset value of the first data packet, The COUNT value of the first data packet is the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB.
或者,在第一QoS流包括多个QoS流的场景下,假设第一QoS流包括QoS流A(用QFI#A表示)和QoS流B(用QFI#B表示),且在收到第一数据包之前,下一个期望收到的QFI#A的MBS QFI SN为a,下一个期望收到的QFI#B的MBS QFI SN为b。那么在收到第一数据包之后,接入网设备可以将a的K个高位比特的值和b的K个高位比特的值相加后再加偏移值得到第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN,将a和b的N-K个低位比特的值相加后作为第一数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN。经过该计算得到的第一数据包的COUNT值即为第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值。Or, in the scenario where the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows, assume that the first QoS flow includes QoS flow A (represented by QFI#A) and QoS flow B (represented by QFI#B), and after receiving the first Before the data packet, the MBS QFI SN of the next expected QFI#A is a, and the MBS QFI SN of the next expected QFI#B is b. Then after receiving the first data packet, the access network device can add the value of the K high-order bits of a and the value of the K high-order bits of b and then add the offset value to obtain the COUNT value of the first data packet. HFN, add the N-K low-order bit values of a and b as the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first data packet. The COUNT value of the first data packet obtained through this calculation is the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB.
需要说明的是,在COUN值的长度等于N,HFN的长度等于K时,PDCP SN的长度等于N-K。本申请中,PDCP SN的长度也可以用PDCP-SN-Size表示。此外,HFN的长度也可以表示为N-[PDCP-SN-Size]。也就是说,本申请中,N-K可以替换为PDCP-SN-Size,K可以替换为N-[PDCP-SN-Size]。It should be noted that when the length of the COUN value is equal to N and the length of HFN is equal to K, the length of the PDCP SN is equal to N-K. In this application, the length of PDCP SN can also be expressed by PDCP-SN-Size. In addition, the length of HFN can also be expressed as N-[PDCP-SN-Size]. That is to say, in this application, N-K can be replaced by PDCP-SN-Size, and K can be replaced by N-[PDCP-SN-Size].
可选的,第二阈值可以小于或等于2N-1,其中,N为COUNT的长度。在COUNT的长度和MBS QFI SN的长度相等时,从COUNT的角度来说,N为COUNT的长度,从MBS QFI SN的角度来说,N为MBS QFI SN的长度。Optionally, the second threshold may be less than or equal to 2 N -1, where N is the length of COUNT. When the length of COUNT is equal to the length of MBS QFI SN, from the perspective of COUNT, N is the length of COUNT, and from the perspective of MBS QFI SN, N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
2)第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1,其中,M1为正整数。2) The difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer.
其中,第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值可参考上述情况1)中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB, reference may be made to the relevant description in case 1) above, which will not be described again here.
可选的,第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1,也可以理解为:第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值接近第二阈值。Optionally, the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, which can also be understood as: the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is close to the second threshold.
可选的,接入网设备在收到第一数据包后,可以计算第一数据包的COUNT值,在第一数据包的COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1时,第一数据包的COUNT值即为第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值。Optionally, after receiving the first data packet, the access network device can calculate the COUNT value of the first data packet. When the difference between the COUNT value of the first data packet and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, The COUNT value of the first data packet is the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB.
3)第一MRB将被停用或将被释放。3) The first MRB will be deactivated or will be released.
可选的,第一MRB被停用或被释放的原因可以为发生了上述情况1)或情况2),或者发生了下述情况4)或情况5)。当然,还可以为其他原因,本申请对此不做具体限定。Optionally, the reason why the first MRB is deactivated or released may be that the above situation 1) or situation 2) occurs, or the following situation 4) or situation 5) occurs. Of course, there may also be other reasons, which are not specifically limited in this application.
4)第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值。 4) The maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
可选的,在接入网设备基于MBS QFI SN和偏移值确定COUNT值时,第三阈值可以为使得COUNT值等于第二阈值的MBS QFI SN,例如,在第二阈值为2N-1时,第三阈值小于或等于2N-X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1。其中,X表示偏移值。Optionally, when the access network device determines the COUNT value based on the MBS QFI SN and the offset value, the third threshold may be the MBS QFI SN such that the COUNT value is equal to the second threshold, for example, when the second threshold is 2 N -1 When , the third threshold is less than or equal to 2 N -X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] -1. Among them, X represents the offset value.
可选的,该第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN可以理解为:对于第一QoS流,核心网设备实际已经使用的MBS QFI SN中的最大值,而不是理论上能够达到的MBS QFI SN的最大值(例如2N-1)。Optionally, the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow can be understood as: for the first QoS flow, the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN actually used by the core network equipment, rather than the theoretically achievable MBS QFI SN. Maximum value (e.g. 2 N -1).
可选的,接入网设备收到第一数据包,并获取第一数据包的MBS QFI SN后,可以将第一数据包的MBS QFI SN作为第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN。Optionally, after the access network device receives the first data packet and obtains the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, it can use the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet as the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow.
5)第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2。其中,M2为正整数。可选的,M2和M1相等。5) The difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2. Among them, M2 is a positive integer. Optional, M2 and M1 are equal.
其中,第三阈值和第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN的说明可参考上述情况4)中的相关描述。Among them, the description of the third threshold and the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow may refer to the relevant description in case 4) above.
需要说明的是,实际应用中,在上述情况1)-5)描述的关系满足时,接入网设备即可发送第一指示信息。上述情况1)-5)的描述不应作为严格的限制条件,例如,在情况1)中,接入网设备在确定第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值减第二阈值等于0时,也可以发送第一指示信息。It should be noted that in actual applications, when the relationships described in the above situations 1)-5) are satisfied, the access network device can send the first indication information. The descriptions of situations 1)-5) above should not be used as strict restrictions. For example, in situation 1), when the access network device determines that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB minus the second threshold is equal to 0, it also The first instruction information can be sent.
S903、核心网设备根据第一指示信息设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN。其中,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。进一步的,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0。S903. The core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is smaller than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. Further, the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0.
可选的,核心网设备设置第一QoS流的第二数据包,也可以理解为:核心网设备翻转(wrap around)或重置或初始化第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, the core network device sets the second data packet of the first QoS flow, which can also be understood as: the core network device wraps around or resets or initializes the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow.
可选的,在第一QoS流包括多个QoS流时,第二数据包可以包括该多个QoS流中的部分QoS流的数据包,或者,第二数据包可以包括该多个QoS流中的所有QoS流的数据包。Optionally, when the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows, the second data packet may include data packets of some of the multiple QoS flows, or the second data packet may include data packets of some of the multiple QoS flows. packets for all QoS flows.
也就是说,第一QoS流包括多个QoS流时,核心网设备可以将该多个QoS流中的部分QoS流的MBS QFI SN设置为大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的值。或者,可以将该多个QoS流中的所有QoS流的MBS QFI SN设置为大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的值。That is to say, when the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows, the core network device can set the MBS QFI SN of some of the multiple QoS flows to be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI of the first data packet. The value of SN. Alternatively, the MBS QFI SN of all QoS flows in the multiple QoS flows may be set to a value greater than or equal to 0 and less than the value of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
示例性的,以第一QoS流包括QoS流A(用QFI#A表示)和QoS流B(用QFI#B表示)为例,假设第一数据包为QFI#A的数据包,那么第二数据包可以为QFI#A的数据包,或者,第二数据包可以为QFI#B的数据包,或者,第二数据包可以包括QFI#A的数据包以及QFI#B的数据包。For example, taking the first QoS flow including QoS flow A (denoted by QFI#A) and QoS flow B (denoted by QFI#B), assuming that the first data packet is a data packet of QFI#A, then the second The data packet may be a data packet of QFI#A, or the second data packet may be a data packet of QFI#B, or the second data packet may include a data packet of QFI#A and a data packet of QFI#B.
可选的,核心网设备根据第一指示信息设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN可以理解为,核心网设备基于第一指示信息的触发,设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, the core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. It can be understood that the core network device sets the second data of the first QoS flow based on the trigger of the first indication information. Package MBS QFI SN.
可选的,核心网设备在设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之后,可以向接入网设备发送该第二数据包。相应的,接入网设备收到第二数据包后,可以确定第二数据包的COUNT值并向终端设备发送第二数据包,并且在发送给终端设备的第二数据包中包括COUNT值的PDCP SN。Optionally, after the core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow, the core network device can send the second data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, after receiving the second data packet, the access network device can determine the COUNT value of the second data packet and send the second data packet to the terminal device, and include the COUNT value in the second data packet sent to the terminal device. PDCP SN.
现有方案中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于2N-1时,在第一数据包之后发送的数据包的MBS QFI SN将在第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的基础上依次增加,直至第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1。基于本申请的方案,接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信 息,使得核心网设备能够在第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值时,基于第一指示信息设置第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。也就是说,核心网设备可以在第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN未达到第一阈值时,重新设置该第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN,有效减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,从而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高通信可靠性。In the existing solution, when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than 2 N -1, the MBS QFI SN of the data packets sent after the first data packet will increase sequentially based on the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. The MBS QFI SN of the packets up to the first QoS flow is equal to 2 N -1. Based on the solution of this application, the access network equipment sends the first instruction letter to the core network equipment. information, so that when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold, the core network device can set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet to be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI of the first data packet based on the first indication information. SN. That is to say, the core network device can reset the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow does not reach the first threshold, effectively reducing the problem caused by excessive MBS QFI SN. The COUNT value overflows, thereby reducing packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improving communication reliability.
在图9所示方法的一些实施例中,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包,可以包括:第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第M3个数据包,M3为正整数。可选的,从接入网设备的角度来说,M3小于或等于M1+1,M1即为第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的最大差值;从核心网设备的角度来说,M3小于或等于M2+1,M2即为第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的最大差值。In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 9, the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet, which may include: the second data packet is the M3th data packet after the first data packet, and M3 is a positive integer. . Optionally, from the perspective of the access network equipment, M3 is less than or equal to M1+1, and M1 is the maximum difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold; from the core network equipment From the perspective of M3 is less than or equal to M2+1, M2 is the maximum difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
当M3等于1时,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第一个数据包。该场景下,可以认为核心网设备在发送第一数据包之后,接收到第一指示信息之前未向接入网设备发送数据包;或者,可以认为核心网设备在发送第一数据包之后,接收到第一指示信息之前,向接入网设备发送了至少一个数据包,但是接入网设备丢弃了这部分数据包,核心网设备基于实现在收到第一指示信息后重新发送该至少一个数据包。此外,可以认为接入网设备是在上述情况1)或情况4)发生时,向核心网设备发送的第一指示信息。When M3 is equal to 1, the second data packet is the first data packet after the first data packet. In this scenario, it can be considered that after the core network device sends the first data packet, it does not send the data packet to the access network device before receiving the first indication information; or, it can be considered that after the core network device sends the first data packet, it receives Before the first indication information is received, at least one data packet is sent to the access network device, but the access network device discards this part of the data packet, and the core network device resends the at least one data packet after receiving the first indication information based on the implementation. Bag. In addition, it can be considered that the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device when the above situation 1) or 4) occurs.
示例性的,以第二阈值等于1000,第一MRB的最大COUNT值是第一数据包的COUNT值为例,假设接入网设备收到第一数据包后,确定第一数据包的COUNT值等于1000,那么接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。核心网设备收到第一指示信息后,向接入网设备发送第二数据包,该第二数据包的MBS QFI SN可以等于0。For example, assuming that the second threshold is equal to 1000 and the maximum COUNT value of the first MRB is the COUNT value of the first data packet, it is assumed that after receiving the first data packet, the access network device determines the COUNT value of the first data packet. is equal to 1000, then the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device. After receiving the first indication information, the core network device sends a second data packet to the access network device, and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet may be equal to 0.
当M3大于1且小于或等于M1(或M2)时,第二数据包和第一数据包之间还存在至少一个第三数据包。该场景下,可以认为核心网设备在发送第一数据包之后,还向接入网设备发送该至少一个第三数据包,并且在该至少一个第三数据包之后,向接入网设备发送第二数据包。此外,可以认为接入网设备是在上述情况2)或情况5)发生时,向核心网设备发送的第一指示信息。When M3 is greater than 1 and less than or equal to M1 (or M2), there is at least one third data packet between the second data packet and the first data packet. In this scenario, it can be considered that after sending the first data packet, the core network device also sends the at least one third data packet to the access network device, and after the at least one third data packet, sends the third data packet to the access network device. Two data packets. In addition, it can be considered that the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device when the above situation 2) or situation 5) occurs.
其中,第三数据包是第一QoS流的数据包。在第一QoS流为一个QoS流时,第三数据包的MBS QFI SN大于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。在第一QoS流为一个QoS流,且存在多个第三数据包的情况下,最后一个第三数据包的MBS QFI SN小于或等于第三阈值,或者,最后一个第三数据包的COUNT值小于或等于第二阈值。在第一QoS流包括多个QoS流,且存在多个第三数据包的情况下,该多个第三数据包的MBS QFI SN之和小于或等于第三阈值。Wherein, the third data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow. When the first QoS flow is a QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the third data packet is greater than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. When the first QoS flow is a QoS flow and there are multiple third data packets, the MBS QFI SN of the last third data packet is less than or equal to the third threshold, or the COUNT value of the last third data packet Less than or equal to the second threshold. In the case where the first QoS flow includes multiple QoS flows and there are multiple third data packets, the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple third data packets is less than or equal to the third threshold.
示例性的,以第二阈值等于1000,M1等于10,第一MRB的最大COUNT值是第一数据包的COUNT值为例,假设接入网设备收到第一数据包后,确定第一数据包的COUNT值等于990,和第二阈值之间的差值等于10,即第一MRB的最大COUNT值和第二阈值之间差值等于M1,此时,接入网设备可以向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。For example, assuming that the second threshold is equal to 1000, M1 is equal to 10, and the maximum COUNT value of the first MRB is the COUNT value of the first data packet, it is assumed that after receiving the first data packet, the access network device determines the first data The COUNT value of the packet is equal to 990, and the difference between it and the second threshold is equal to 10, that is, the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the first MRB and the second threshold is equal to M1. At this time, the access network device can send a request to the core network device. Send the first instruction message.
在核心网设备发送第一数据包后,收到第一指示信息前,未向接入网设备发送数据包的场景下,核心网设备收到第一指示信息后,可以向接入网设备发送10个第三数据包。此时第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第11个数据包。当然,核心网设备发送的第三数据包的个数也可以小于10,例如,发送8个第三数据包,此时,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第9个数据包。In the scenario where the core network device sends the first data packet but before receiving the first instruction information, the data packet is not sent to the access network device. After the core network device receives the first instruction information, it may send a data packet to the access network device. 10 third packets. At this time, the second data packet is the 11th data packet after the first data packet. Of course, the number of third data packets sent by the core network device may also be less than 10. For example, 8 third data packets are sent. In this case, the second data packet is the ninth data packet after the first data packet.
在核心网设备发送第一数据包后,收到第一指示信息前,还向接入网设备发送了数据包的场景下,核心网设备收到第一指示信息后,可以向接入网设备发送(10-M4)个第三数据包。 其中,M4为发送第一数据包后,收到第一指示信息前,核心网设备向接入网设备发送的数据包的个数。例如,接入网设备在第一数据包的COUNT值等于990时向核心网设备发送了第一指示信息,由于传输时延,核心网设备在第一数据包后还发送了两个数据包之后,收到了第一指示信息,那么核心网设备在收到第一指示信息后,可以向接入网设备发送10-2=8个第三数据包,此时,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第8个数据包。当然,核心网设备发送的第三数据包的个数也可以小于(10-M4),例如发送4个第三数据包,此时,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的第5个数据包。In the scenario where the core network device sends the first data packet but before receiving the first instruction information, it also sends the data packet to the access network device. After receiving the first instruction information, the core network device may send the data packet to the access network device. Send (10-M4) third data packets. Wherein, M4 is the number of data packets sent by the core network device to the access network device after sending the first data packet and before receiving the first indication information. For example, the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device when the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to 990. Due to the transmission delay, the core network device sends two more data packets after the first data packet. , after receiving the first indication information, the core network device can send 10-2=8 third data packets to the access network device after receiving the first indication information. At this time, the second data packet is the first data The 8th data packet after the packet. Of course, the number of third data packets sent by the core network device can also be less than (10-M4). For example, 4 third data packets are sent. In this case, the second data packet is the fifth data after the first data packet. Bag.
可选的,接入网设备在向核心网设备发送第一指示信息时,还可以向核心网设备指示第一数据包,例如,向核心网设备发送第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,以便核心网设备确定上述M4。当然,接入网设备也可以不向核心网设备指示第一数据包,此时,核心网设备收到第一指示信息后,在第二数据包之前,可以发送尽量少的第三数据包。Optionally, when the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device, it can also indicate the first data packet to the core network device, for example, send the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet to the core network device so that the core network device The network device determines the above M4. Of course, the access network device may not indicate the first data packet to the core network device. In this case, after receiving the first indication information, the core network device may send as few third data packets as possible before the second data packet.
基于该方案,接入网设备在第一MRB的最大COUNT值接近第二阈值,或者,第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN接近第三阈值时,向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,为第一指示信息的传输预留了较长的时间,使得核心网设备能够在COUNT值溢出前收到第一指示信息,并根据第一指示信息设置第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,有效减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,从而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高通信可靠性。Based on this solution, when the maximum COUNT value of the first MRB is close to the second threshold, or when the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is close to the third threshold, the access network device sends the first indication information to the core network device. A long time is reserved for the transmission of the first indication information, so that the core network equipment can receive the first indication information before the COUNT value overflows, and set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet according to the first indication information, effectively reducing the MBS QFI The COUNT value overflow caused by excessive SN reduces packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improves communication reliability.
在图9所示方法的一些实施例中,第一指示信息包括的内容可以存在如下两种可能的实现方式:In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 9, the content included in the first indication information may be implemented in the following two possible ways:
作为一种可能的实现方式,第一指示信息可以包括以下a)-g)中的至少一项:As a possible implementation, the first indication information may include at least one of the following a)-g):
a)指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值的信息。a) Information indicating that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold.
可选的,第一指示信息可以包括比特A,在该比特A的取值为1或0时,可以指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值。Optionally, the first indication information may include bit A. When the value of bit A is 1 or 0, it may indicate that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold.
b)指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息。b) Information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1.
可选的,第一指示信息可以包括比特B,在该比特B的取值为1或0时,可以指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1。M1可以是协议定义的,或者接入网设备预配置的。Optionally, the first indication information may include bit B. When the value of bit B is 1 or 0, it may indicate that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1. M1 can be defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the access network device.
或者,第一指示信息可以包括第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值或者M1。其中,该差值小于或等于M1。Alternatively, the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold or M1. Among them, the difference is less than or equal to M1.
c)指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值的信息。c) Information indicating the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold.
可选的,第一指示信息可以包括第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值。Optionally, the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold.
或者,第一指示信息可以包括字段C,该字段C的一种取值对应第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的一个差值。Alternatively, the first indication information may include field C, and a value of field C corresponds to a difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold.
示例性的,该字段C可以指示在第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值等于第二阈值之前,剩余能够使用的HFN的个数,或者,剩余能够使用的PDCP SN的个数。For example, the field C may indicate the number of remaining HFNs that can be used before the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold, or the number of remaining PDCP SNs that can be used.
在字段C指示剩余能够使用的HFN的个数时,第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值为L*2PDCP-SN-Size,L为剩余能够使用的HFN的个数。在字段C指示剩余能够使用的PDCP SN的个数时,第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于该剩余能够使用的PDCP SN的个数。When field C indicates the number of remaining HFNs that can be used, the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is L*2 PDCP-SN-Size , and L is the remaining HFNs that can be used. number. When field C indicates the number of remaining usable PDCP SNs, the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the number of remaining usable PDCP SNs.
d)第一MRB的状态信息。 d) Status information of the first MRB.
可选的,第一MRB的状态信息可以包括:第一MRB(将)被停用,或者第一MRB(将)被释放,或者,第一MRB不再被继续使用,或者,第一MRB无法继续使用。Optionally, the status information of the first MRB may include: the first MRB (will be) deactivated, or the first MRB (will be) released, or the first MRB will no longer be used, or the first MRB cannot be used. continue to use.
e)指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值的信息。e) Information indicating that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
可选的,第一指示信息可以包括比特D,在该比特D的取值为1或0时,可以指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值。Optionally, the first indication information may include bit D. When the value of bit D is 1 or 0, it may be indicated that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
f)指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息。f) Information indicating that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2.
可选的,第一指示信息可以包括比特E,在该比特E的取值为1或0时,可以指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2。Optionally, the first indication information may include bit E. When the value of bit E is 1 or 0, it may indicate that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2 .
或者,第一指示信息可以包括第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值。其中,该差值小于或等于M2。Alternatively, the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold. Among them, the difference is less than or equal to M2.
g)指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值的信息。g) Information indicating the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
可选的,第一指示信息可以包括第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值。或者,第一指示信息可以包括字段F,该字段F的一种取值对应第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的一个差值。Optionally, the first indication information may include a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold. Alternatively, the first indication information may include field F, and a value of field F corresponds to a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
进一步的,第一指示信息还可以包括标识信息,标识信息包括以下至少一项:第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识。其中,标识信息用于向核心网设备指示第一指示信息是关于第一MRB、第一QoS流、或上述MBS业务的指示信息。Further, the first indication information may also include identification information, and the identification information includes at least one of the following: an identification of the first MRB, an identification of the first QoS flow, or an identification of the MBS service. The identification information is used to indicate to the core network device that the first indication information is indication information about the first MRB, the first QoS flow, or the above-mentioned MBS service.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,第一指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识。其中,第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识中的至少一项可以指示上述a)-g)中的至少一种信息。As another possible implementation manner, the first indication information may include at least one of the following: an identity of the first MRB, an identity of the first QoS flow, or an identity of the MBS service. Wherein, at least one of the identity of the first MRB, the identity of the first QoS flow, or the identity of the MBS service may indicate at least one of the above information a)-g).
示例性的,第一指示信息包括第一MRB的标识时,可以指示上述a)-g)中与第一MRB相关的信息。例如,可以指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值,或者指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1,或者指示第一MRB的状态信息。For example, when the first indication information includes the identification of the first MRB, it may indicate the information related to the first MRB in the above a)-g). For example, it may indicate that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold, or it may indicate that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, or it may indicate that the first MRB status information.
第一指示信息包括第一QoS流的标识(或包括第一QoS流的标识和MBS业务的标识)时,可以指示上述a)-g)中与第一QoS流相关的信息。例如,可以指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值,或者指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2。When the first indication information includes the identifier of the first QoS flow (or includes the identifier of the first QoS flow and the identifier of the MBS service), it may indicate the information related to the first QoS flow in the above a)-g). For example, it may be indicated that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold, or it may be indicated that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2.
当然,由于第一MRB和第一QoS流之间存在关联关系,第一指示信息包括第一MRB的标识时,也可以指示a)-g)中与第一QoS流相关的信息。第一指示信息包括第一QoS流的标识(或包括第一QoS流的标识和MBS业务的标识)时,也可以指示a)-g)中与第一MRB相关的信息。Of course, since there is an association relationship between the first MRB and the first QoS flow, when the first indication information includes the identification of the first MRB, the information related to the first QoS flow in a)-g) may also be indicated. When the first indication information includes the identifier of the first QoS flow (or includes the identifier of the first QoS flow and the identifier of the MBS service), the information related to the first MRB in a)-g) may also be indicated.
可选的,第一指示信息可以承载在现有的信息元素(information element,IE)中,也可以承载在新定义的IE中,本申请对此不做具体限定。Optionally, the first indication information can be carried in an existing information element (IE) or in a newly defined IE, which is not specifically limited in this application.
在图9所示方法的一些实施例中,接入网设备可以释放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。其中,第二数据包承载于该第二MRB。In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 9, the access network device may release the first MRB and establish the second MRB. The second data packet is carried on the second MRB.
可选的,第二MRB的相关配置和第一MRB的相关配置可以相同,也可以不同,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the related configuration of the second MRB and the related configuration of the first MRB may be the same or different, and this application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,第二MRB的建立可以在第一MRB释放完成之后执行。或者,可以在释放第一MRB之前执行。例如,接入网设备可以在通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据之前建立第二MRB,本申请对此不作具体限定。若接入网设备在释放第一MRB之前建立第二MRB, 那么接入网设备在收到第二数据包后,可以及时地将第二数据包发送给终端设备,从而降低业务时延。Optionally, the establishment of the second MRB may be performed after the release of the first MRB is completed. Alternatively, it can be executed before releasing the first MRB. For example, the access network device may establish the second MRB before sending the first data to the terminal device through the first MRB, which is not specifically limited in this application. If the access network device establishes the second MRB before releasing the first MRB, Then, after receiving the second data packet, the access network device can promptly send the second data packet to the terminal device, thereby reducing service delay.
作为一种可能的实现,接入网设备可以在通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据包后,释放第一MRB。As a possible implementation, the access network device may release the first MRB after sending the first data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB.
作为另一种可能的实现,接入网设备可以在收到第二数据包后释放第一MRB。该场景下,若接入网设备在释放第一MRB后建立第二MRB,那么接入网设备需要缓存第二数据包,并在第二MRB建立完成后,通过第二MRB向终端设备发送第二数据包。As another possible implementation, the access network device may release the first MRB after receiving the second data packet. In this scenario, if the access network device establishes the second MRB after releasing the first MRB, the access network device needs to cache the second data packet, and after the second MRB is established, send the second MRB to the terminal device through the second MRB. Two data packets.
作为又一种可能的实现,存在第三数据包时,接入网设备可以在通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据包和第三数据包后,释放第一MRB。或者,在通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据包和第三数据包并收到第二数据包后,释放第一MRB。As another possible implementation, when the third data packet exists, the access network device may release the first MRB after sending the first data packet and the third data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB. Alternatively, after sending the first data packet and the third data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB and receiving the second data packet, the first MRB is released.
可选的,接入网设备释放第一MRB,可以包括:向终端设备发送第一信令,该第一信令用于释放第一MRB。Optionally, the access network device releasing the first MRB may include: sending a first signaling to the terminal device, the first signaling being used to release the first MRB.
可选的,接入网设备可以基于终端设备上报的状态指示信息,向终端设备发送第一信令。也就是说,接入网设备收到来自终端设备的状态指示信息后,向终端设备发送第一信令。Optionally, the access network device may send the first signaling to the terminal device based on the status indication information reported by the terminal device. That is to say, after receiving the status indication information from the terminal device, the access network device sends the first signaling to the terminal device.
作为一种可能的实现,该状态指示信息可以用于指示终端设备成功接收的第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值。As a possible implementation, the status indication information may be used to indicate the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device.
可选的,在该可能的实现中,接入网设备收到该状态指示信息后,可以判断终端设备成功接收的第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值是否等于第二阈值。若相等,则向终端设备发送第一信令。Optionally, in this possible implementation, after receiving the status indication information, the access network device can determine whether the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device is equal to the second threshold. If equal, the first signaling is sent to the terminal device.
或者,在该可能的实现中,接入网设备可以预先向终端设备配置第二阈值,用于终端设备在成功接收的第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值时,向接入网设备发送该状态指示信息。或者,可以预先向终端设备配置第二阈值和M1,用于终端设备在成功接收的第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1时,向接入网设备发送该状态指示信息。此时,接入网设备在收到状态指示信息后,可以不执行判断,立即向终端设备发送第一信令。Alternatively, in this possible implementation, the access network device may configure a second threshold to the terminal device in advance, so that when the maximum COUNT value of the successfully received data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold, the terminal device sends a request to the access network device. The network device sends this status indication information. Alternatively, the second threshold and M1 may be configured in advance for the terminal device, so that when the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the successfully received data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, the terminal device will access the terminal device. The network device sends this status indication information. At this time, after receiving the status indication information, the access network device may not perform judgment and immediately send the first signaling to the terminal device.
示例性的,以第一数据包的COUNT值等于第二阈值为例,终端设备在成功接收到第一数据包后,可以向接入网设备发送该状态指示信息。For example, assuming that the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the second threshold, the terminal device may send the status indication information to the access network device after successfully receiving the first data packet.
作为另一种可能的实现,该状态指示信息用于指示终端设备成功接收的第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值,以及COUNT值小于该最大COUNT值的数据包已经递交上层。其中,在接收端,上层指在PDCP层之后处理数据包的协议层,例如SDAP层或应用层。As another possible implementation, the status indication information is used to indicate the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device, and the data packet whose COUNT value is smaller than the maximum COUNT value has been submitted to the upper layer. Among them, at the receiving end, the upper layer refers to the protocol layer that processes data packets after the PDCP layer, such as the SDAP layer or application layer.
可选的,在该可能的实现中,接入网设备收到该状态指示信息后,可以判断终端设备成功接收的第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值是否等于第二阈值。若相等,则向终端设备发送第一信令。Optionally, in this possible implementation, after receiving the status indication information, the access network device can determine whether the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB successfully received by the terminal device is equal to the second threshold. If equal, the first signaling is sent to the terminal device.
或者,在该可能的实现中,接入网设备可以预先配置第二阈值,或者预先配置第二阈值和M1,可参考上述相关描述,在此不再赘述。Alternatively, in this possible implementation, the access network device may pre-configure the second threshold, or pre-configure the second threshold and M1. Reference may be made to the above related description, which will not be described again here.
作为又一种可能的实现,该状态指示信息用于指示还未递交上层但是等待递交的第一个PDCP SDU的COUNT值,即用于指示RX_DELIV。As another possible implementation, the status indication information is used to indicate the COUNT value of the first PDCP SDU that has not been submitted to the upper layer but is waiting to be submitted, that is, it is used to indicate RX_DELIV.
可选的,在该可能的实现中,接入网设备收到该状态指示信息后,可以判断RX_DELIV是否大于或等于第二阈值,若RX_DELIV大于或等于第二阈值,则向终端设备发送第一信令。Optionally, in this possible implementation, after receiving the status indication information, the access network device can determine whether RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the second threshold, and if RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the second threshold, send the first message to the terminal device. signaling.
或者,在该可能的实现中,接入网设备可以预先向终端设备配置第二阈值,用于终端设备在RX_DELIV大于或等于第二阈值时,向接入网设备发送该状态指示信息。此时,接入网 设备在收到状态指示信息后,可以不执行判断,立即向终端设备发送第一信令。Alternatively, in this possible implementation, the access network device may configure the second threshold to the terminal device in advance, so that the terminal device sends the status indication information to the access network device when RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the second threshold. At this time, the access network After receiving the status indication information, the device may immediately send the first signaling to the terminal device without performing judgment.
基于该方案,接入网设备基于终端设备上报的状态信息释放第一MRB,可以避免在终端设备使用第一MRB的过程中释放第一MRB而导致数据丢失,提高了通信的可靠性。Based on this solution, the access network device releases the first MRB based on the status information reported by the terminal device, which can avoid data loss caused by releasing the first MRB when the terminal device uses the first MRB, and improves the reliability of communication.
可选的,接入网设备建立第二MRB,可以包括:向终端设备发送第二信令,该第二信令用于建立第二MRB。Optionally, the access network device establishing the second MRB may include: sending second signaling to the terminal device, the second signaling being used to establish the second MRB.
可选的,接入网设备在释放第一MRB之后建立第二MRB时,第一信令和第二信令可以携带在同一条消息中,或者,第一信令和第二信令可以携带在两条消息中,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, when the access network device establishes the second MRB after releasing the first MRB, the first signaling and the second signaling may be carried in the same message, or the first signaling and the second signaling may be carried In the two messages, this application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,接入网设备可以在MBS业务的状态为去激活状态时,执行上述步骤902。由于去激活状态下,核心网设备不发送MBS业务的数据,且终端设备的RRC连接有可能被释放。在释放RRC连接时,需要释放MRB,此时,在接入网设备不发送第一信令的情况下,也可以实现第一MRB的释放,节省了信令开销。后续,在MBS业务的状态由去激活状态变为激活状态时,接入网设备需要和终端设备重新建立RRC连接,在重新建立RRC连接的过程中,需要新建MRB。因此,在接入网设备不发送第二信令的情况下,也可以实现第二MRB的新建,同样节省了信令开销。Optionally, the access network device may perform the above step 902 when the status of the MBS service is deactivated. Because in the deactivated state, the core network equipment does not send MBS service data, and the RRC connection of the terminal equipment may be released. When releasing the RRC connection, the MRB needs to be released. At this time, the first MRB can be released without the access network device sending the first signaling, thereby saving signaling overhead. Subsequently, when the status of the MBS service changes from the deactivated state to the activated state, the access network device needs to re-establish an RRC connection with the terminal device. During the process of re-establishing the RRC connection, a new MRB needs to be created. Therefore, when the access network device does not send the second signaling, the second MRB can also be created, which also saves signaling overhead.
图9所示方法中,核心网设备基于接入网设备的第一指示信息,在QoS流的MBS QFI SN到达第一阈值前设置该QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN,减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出。此外,本申请还提供一种通信方法,该方法中,核心网设备可以通过释放MBS会话或删除QoS流的方式限制MBS QFI SN过大,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出。如图10所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤:In the method shown in Figure 9, based on the first indication information of the access network device, the core network device sets the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the QoS flow before the MBS QFI SN of the QoS flow reaches the first threshold, thereby reducing the MBS QFI SN process. The COUNT value overflows due to a large value. In addition, this application also provides a communication method in which the core network device can limit the MBS QFI SN from being too large by releasing the MBS session or deleting the QoS flow, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large. As shown in Figure 10, the communication method includes the following steps:
S1001、接入网设备生成第二指示信息。S1001. The access network device generates second indication information.
可选的,在步骤S1001之前,核心网设备可以向接入网设备发送第一数据包。相应的,接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包。该第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于第一阈值。该第一QoS流关联第一MRB。第一QoS流为该MBS业务的第一MBS会话中的QoS流。Optionally, before step S1001, the core network device may send the first data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device. The first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service, and the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than the first threshold. The first QoS flow is associated with the first MRB. The first QoS flow is the QoS flow in the first MBS session of the MBS service.
可选的,接入网设备可以在下述情况中的任一情况发生时,生成第二指示信息,或者说,接入网设备可以在下述条件中的任一条件满足时,生成该第二指示信息:Optionally, the access network device may generate the second indication information when any of the following conditions occurs, or in other words, the access network device may generate the second indication when any of the following conditions are met. information:
1)第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值。1) The maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold.
2)第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1,其中,M1为正整数。2) The difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer.
3)第一MRB将被停用或将被释放。3) The first MRB will be deactivated or will be released.
4)第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值。4) The maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
5)第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2。其中,M2为正整数。可选的,M2和M1相等。5) The difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2. Among them, M2 is a positive integer. Optional, M2 and M1 are equal.
其中,该5种情况的说明可参考上述步骤S902中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For descriptions of these five situations, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the above step S902, which will not be described again here.
在一些实施例中,接入网设备在上述情况1)-5)中的任一情况发生时生成第二指示信息的情况下:In some embodiments, when the access network device generates the second indication information when any of the above situations 1)-5) occurs:
作为一种可能的实现,该第二指示信息用于核心网设备释放MBS的第一MBS会话。进一步的,该第二指示信息还可以用于核心网设备建立该MBS业务的第二MBS会话。As a possible implementation, the second indication information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the MBS. Further, the second indication information can also be used by the core network device to establish a second MBS session of the MBS service.
作为另一种可能的实现,该第二指示信息用于核心网设备删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流。进一步的,该第二指示信息还可以用于核心网设备在该第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS 流。As another possible implementation, the second indication information is used by the core network device to delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session. Further, the second indication information can also be used by the core network device to add the second QoS in the first MBS session. flow.
在另一些实施例中,不限制接入网设备生成第二指示信息的条件的情况下:In other embodiments, without limiting the conditions for the access network device to generate the second indication information:
作为一种可能的实现,该第二指示信息用于核心网设备释放MBS的第一MBS会话,并建立该MBS业务的第二MBS会话。As a possible implementation, the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the MBS and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service.
作为另一种可能的实现,该第二指示信息用于核心网设备删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在该第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。As another possible implementation, the second indication information is used by the core network device to delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
S1002、接入网设备向核心网设备发送第二指示信息。相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第二指示信息。S1002. The access network device sends the second instruction information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the second indication information from the access network device.
其中,核心网设备在收到第二指示信息后,可以执行下述步骤S1003a,或者执行下述步骤S1003b。After receiving the second instruction information, the core network device may perform the following step S1003a, or perform the following step S1003b.
示例性的,在第二指示信息用于核心网设备释放MBS的第一MBS会话,并建立该MBS业务的第二MBS会话时,执行下述步骤S1003a。在第二指示信息用于核心网设备删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在该第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流时,执行下述步骤S1003b。For example, when the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the MBS and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service, the following step S1003a is performed. When the second instruction information is used for the core network device to delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session, the following step S1003b is performed.
S1003a、核心网设备根据该第二指示信息释放MBS业务的第一MBS会话,并建立该MBS业务的第二MBS会话。S1003a. The core network device releases the first MBS session of the MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establishes the second MBS session of the MBS service.
可选的,在该步骤S1003a中,可以认为核心网设备基于第二指示信息的触发释放第一MBS会话,并建立第二MBS会话。Optionally, in step S1003a, it can be considered that the core network device releases the first MBS session based on the trigger of the second indication information and establishes the second MBS session.
可选的,第一MBS会话和第二MBS会话的会话标识、临时多播组标识(temporary multicast group identifier,TMGI)等可以相同,也可以不同,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the session identifier, temporary multicast group identifier (TMGI), etc. of the first MBS session and the second MBS session may be the same or different, and this application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,核心网设备可以以终端设备为粒度释放第一MBS会话,相应的,以终端设备为粒度建立第二MBS会话。或者,核心网设备可以以MBS业务为粒度删除第一MBS会话,相应的,以MBS业务为粒度建立第二MBS会话。Optionally, the core network device can release the first MBS session with the terminal device as the granularity, and correspondingly, establish the second MBS session with the terminal device as the granularity. Alternatively, the core network device may delete the first MBS session with the MBS service as the granularity, and correspondingly, establish the second MBS session with the MBS service as the granularity.
可选的,核心网设备释放MBS业务的第一MBS会话,可以包括:核心网设备向接入网设备发送第三信令,该第三信令用于释放第一MBS会话。核心网设备建立第二MBS会话,可以包括:核心网设备向接入网设备发送第四信令,该第四信令用于建立第二MBS会话。Optionally, the core network device releasing the first MBS session of the MBS service may include: the core network device sending third signaling to the access network device, the third signaling being used to release the first MBS session. The core network device establishing the second MBS session may include: the core network device sending fourth signaling to the access network device, where the fourth signaling is used to establish the second MBS session.
S1003b、核心网设备根据该第二指示信息删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。S1003b. The core network device deletes the first QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second instruction information, and adds the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
可选的,在该步骤S1003中,可以认为核心网设备基于第二指示信息的触发删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。第一QoS流和第二QoS流的QFI可以相同也可以不同,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in step S1003, it can be considered that the core network device deletes the first QoS flow of the first MBS session based on the triggering of the second indication information, and adds the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. The QFIs of the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow may be the same or different, and this application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,第二QoS流用于传输计划使用第一QoS流传输的数据,即第二QoS流可以理解为第一QoS流的替代QoS流,实现本应该由第一QoS流实现的功能。Optionally, the second QoS flow is used to transmit data planned to be transmitted using the first QoS flow. That is, the second QoS flow can be understood as a substitute QoS flow for the first QoS flow, realizing the functions that should be realized by the first QoS flow.
可选的,核心网设备删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,可以包括:核心网设备向接入网设备发送第五信令,该第五信令用于删除第一QoS流。核心网设备在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流,可以包括:核心网设备向接入网设备发送第六信令,该第六信令用于在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。Optionally, the core network device deleting the first QoS flow of the first MBS session may include: the core network device sending a fifth signaling to the access network device, the fifth signaling being used to delete the first QoS flow. The core network device adding the second QoS flow to the first MBS session may include: the core network device sending sixth signaling to the access network device, the sixth signaling being used to add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. .
可选的,上述第五信令和第六信令可以携带在同一条消息中,或者,可以携带在两条消息中,本申请对此不作具体限定。示例性的,携带第五信令和/或第六信令的消息可以为业务更新请求消息。该业务更新请求消息可以以MBS会话为粒度,也可以以终端设备为粒度。Optionally, the fifth signaling and the sixth signaling may be carried in the same message, or may be carried in two messages, which is not specifically limited in this application. For example, the message carrying the fifth signaling and/or the sixth signaling may be a service update request message. The service update request message may be based on the MBS session as the granularity or the terminal device as the granularity.
可选的,在MBS会话被释放时,MBS会话的QoS流被删除。在QoS流被删除时,该QoS流关联的MRB也需要释放。因此,在步骤S1003a或S1003b之后,接入网设备可以释 放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。该第二MRB可以关联第二MBS会话中的QoS流,或者,可以关联在第一MBS会话中添加的第二QoS流。其中,第一MRB的释放和第二MRB的建立可参考上述图9所示实施例中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the MBS session is released, the QoS flow of the MBS session is deleted. When a QoS flow is deleted, the MRB associated with the QoS flow also needs to be released. Therefore, after step S1003a or S1003b, the access network device can release Place the first MRB and build the second MRB. The second MRB may be associated with the QoS flow in the second MBS session, or may be associated with the second QoS flow added in the first MBS session. For the release of the first MRB and the establishment of the second MRB, reference may be made to the relevant description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , which will not be described again here.
基于该方案,核心网设备可以基于接入网设备的第二指示信息释放MBS业务的第一MBS会话,并建立该MBS业务的第二MBS会话。由于第一MBS会话被释放时,该第一MBS会话的QoS流被删除,在新建第二MBS会话后,该第二MBS会话中的QoS流也是新建的,因此,核心网设备后续在通过第二MBS会话中的QoS流传输MBS业务的数据包时,该数据包的MBS QFI SN可以从0开始,相应的该数据包的COUNT值较小。从而,接入网设备可以根据实际情况,例如在COUNT值即将溢出时,发送该第二指示信息,使得后续数据包的MBS QFI SN较小,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,进而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高通信可靠性。Based on this solution, the core network device can release the first MBS session of the MBS service based on the second instruction information of the access network device, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service. Because when the first MBS session is released, the QoS flow of the first MBS session is deleted. After the second MBS session is created, the QoS flow in the second MBS session is also newly created. Therefore, the core network device subsequently passes the third MBS session. When the QoS stream in the second MBS session transmits the data packet of the MBS service, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, and the corresponding COUNT value of the data packet is smaller. Therefore, the access network device can send the second indication information according to the actual situation, for example, when the COUNT value is about to overflow, so that the MBS QFI SN of subsequent data packets is smaller, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large. This reduces packet loss caused by COUNT value overflow and improves communication reliability.
或者,核心网设备可以基于接入网设备的第二指示信息删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。由于第二QoS流是新添加的,因此,核心网设备后续在通过第二QoS流传输MBS业务的数据包时,该数据包的MBS QFI SN可以从0开始,从而可以减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,提高通信可靠性。Alternatively, the core network device may delete the first QoS flow of the first MBS session based on the second indication information of the access network device, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session. Since the second QoS flow is newly added, when the core network equipment subsequently transmits the MBS service data packet through the second QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet can start from 0, thereby reducing the MBS QFI SN from being too large. The resulting COUNT value overflows and improves communication reliability.
在图10所示方法的一些实施例中,第二指示信息包括的内容可以存在如下两种可能的实现方式:In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 10, the content included in the second indication information may be implemented in the following two possible ways:
作为一种可能的实现方式,第二指示信息可以包括以下a)-g)中的至少一项:As a possible implementation, the second indication information may include at least one of the following a)-g):
a)指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值的信息。a) Information indicating that the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the second threshold.
b)指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息。b) Information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1.
c)指示第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的差值的信息。c) Information indicating the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold.
d)第一MRB的状态信息。d) Status information of the first MRB.
e)指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值的信息。e) Information indicating that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold.
f)指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息。f) Information indicating that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2.
g)指示第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的差值的信息。g) Information indicating the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
进一步的,第二指示信息还可以包括标识信息,标识信息包括以下至少一项:第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识。其中,标识信息用于向核心网设备指示第二指示信息是关于第一MRB、第一QoS流、或上述MBS业务的指示信息。Further, the second indication information may also include identification information, and the identification information includes at least one of the following: an identification of the first MRB, an identification of the first QoS flow, or an identification of the MBS service. The identification information is used to indicate to the core network device that the second indication information is indication information about the first MRB, the first QoS flow, or the above-mentioned MBS service.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,第二指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识。其中,第一MRB的标识、第一QoS流的标识、或MBS业务的标识中的至少一项可以指示上述a)-g)中的至少一种信息。As another possible implementation manner, the second indication information may include at least one of the following: an identity of the first MRB, an identity of the first QoS flow, or an identity of the MBS service. Wherein, at least one of the identity of the first MRB, the identity of the first QoS flow, or the identity of the MBS service may indicate at least one of the above information a)-g).
其中,第二指示信息包括的内容的详细说明可参考上述第一指示信息中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For a detailed description of the content included in the second indication information, please refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned first indication information, which will not be described again here.
可选的,核心网设备收到第二指示信息后,可以获知释放第一MBS会话或删除第一MBS会话的第一QoS流的原因为:MRB(将)被停止使用、MRB(将)被释放、或MRB将被重置中的一项或多项。因此,在上述第三信令中核心网设备可以指示释放第一MBS会话的原因,或者,在上述第五信令中,核心网设备可以指示删除第一QoS流的原因。Optionally, after receiving the second indication information, the core network device can learn that the reason for releasing the first MBS session or deleting the first QoS flow of the first MBS session is: MRB (will) be stopped from use, MRB (will be) One or more of the items will be released or the MRB will be reset. Therefore, in the above third signaling, the core network device may indicate the reason for releasing the first MBS session, or in the above fifth signaling, the core network device may indicate the reason for deleting the first QoS flow.
对于MBS业务,可能存在多个接入网设备发送该MBS业务的数据。在该多个接入网设备中,可能存在部分接入网设备需要针对同一数据包生成相同的COUNT值(称为同步的接入网设备),而另一部分接入网设备无需针对同一数据包生成相同的COUNT值(称为不同步 的接入网设备)。在核心网设备可能第三信令或第五信令发送至该多个接入网设备中的每个接入网设备时,各个接入网设备可以基于信令中指示的上述原因确定是否响应该信令。For the MBS service, there may be multiple access network devices sending data of the MBS service. Among the multiple access network devices, there may be some access network devices that need to generate the same COUNT value for the same data packet (called synchronized access network devices), while other access network devices do not need to generate the same COUNT value for the same data packet. generate the same COUNT value (called out of sync access network equipment). When the core network device may send the third signaling or the fifth signaling to each of the multiple access network devices, each access network device may determine whether to respond based on the above reasons indicated in the signaling. Should signal.
例如,同步的接入网设备可以根据信令中指示的上述原因响应该信令,即执行释放MBS会话或删除QoS流的相关动作。不同步的接入网设备可以根据信令中指示的上述原因不响应该信令。For example, the synchronized access network device can respond to the signaling according to the above reasons indicated in the signaling, that is, perform related actions of releasing the MBS session or deleting the QoS flow. Access network equipment that is not synchronized may not respond to the signaling based on the above reasons indicated in the signaling.
对于图9或图10所示的方法,由于同步的接入网设备针对同一数据包生成相同的COUNT值,因此,各个同步的接入网设备都可能执行上述步骤S902或步骤S1002。此时,会使得核心网设备处理大量相同的信息。基于此,核心网设备可以指定某个同步的接入网设备执行上述步骤S902或S1002。或者,多个同步的接入网设备可以协商确定其中的某个接入网设备执行上述步骤S902或S1002。此时,核心网设备无需处理大量相同的信息,降低了核心网设备的数据处理复杂度。For the method shown in Figure 9 or Figure 10, since the synchronized access network equipment generates the same COUNT value for the same data packet, each synchronized access network equipment may perform the above step S902 or step S1002. At this time, the core network equipment will be forced to process a large amount of the same information. Based on this, the core network device can designate a synchronized access network device to perform the above step S902 or S1002. Alternatively, multiple synchronized access network devices may negotiate and determine that one of the access network devices performs the above step S902 or S1002. At this time, the core network equipment does not need to process a large amount of the same information, which reduces the data processing complexity of the core network equipment.
除图9和图10所示的通信方法外,本申请还提供另一种通信方法。如图11所示,该方法包括如下步骤:In addition to the communication methods shown in Figures 9 and 10, this application also provides another communication method. As shown in Figure 11, the method includes the following steps:
S1101、接入网设备生成第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。S1101. The access network device generates third indication information. The third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN.
其中,该MBS QFI SN的最大值和最小值可以理解为能力值,即MBS QFI SN能够取到的最大值和MBS QFI SN能够取到的最小值。或者,该MBS QFI SN的最大值和最小值用于限定某个QoS流的MBS QFI SN的取值范围。示例性的,某个QoS流的MBS QFI SN的取值范围可以为以下任意一种:[0,最大值]、[最小值,2N-1]、或[最小值,最大值]。其中,N是MBS QFI SN的长度。Among them, the maximum value and minimum value of the MBS QFI SN can be understood as capability values, that is, the maximum value that the MBS QFI SN can obtain and the minimum value that the MBS QFI SN can obtain. Or, the maximum and minimum values of the MBS QFI SN are used to limit the value range of the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow. For example, the value range of the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow can be any of the following: [0, maximum value], [minimum value, 2 N -1], or [minimum value, maximum value]. Among them, N is the length of MBS QFI SN.
可选的,该MBS QFI SN的最大值可以用于限制COUNT值溢出,或者,该MBS QFI SN的最大值可以理解为接入网设备能够接受的最大值,接入网设备能够接受的最大值即为对应COUNT值不溢出的最大MBS QFI SN。示例性的,该MBS QFI SN的最大值小于2N-1。Optionally, the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN can be used to limit the overflow of the COUNT value, or the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN can be understood as the maximum value that the access network device can accept, and the maximum value that the access network device can accept. That is, the maximum MBS QFI SN corresponding to the COUNT value that does not overflow. For example, the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is less than 2 N -1.
可选的,该MBS QFI SN的最小值可以用于避免RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值。示例性的,该MBS QFI SN的最小值大于0。Optionally, the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN can be used to avoid the initial value of the HFN of RX_DELIV being negative. For example, the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is greater than 0.
可选的,第三指示信息可以显式指示该最大值,和/或,最小值,例如,在第三指示信息中包括该最大值,和/或,最小值。Optionally, the third indication information may explicitly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value, for example, the third indication information includes the maximum value and/or the minimum value.
或者,第三指示信息可以隐式指示该最大值,和/或,最小值。例如,可以在第三指示信息中包括用于确定该最大值,和/或,最小值的参数。其中,用于确定该最大值,和/或,最小值的参数将在后续实施例中说明,在此不予赘述。又例如,可以预先定义一组最大值和/或一组最小值,此时,该第三指示信息可以包括最大值的索引和/或最小值的索引。Alternatively, the third indication information may implicitly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value. For example, the third indication information may include parameters for determining the maximum value and/or the minimum value. The parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value will be described in subsequent embodiments and will not be described again here. For another example, a set of maximum values and/or a set of minimum values may be predefined, and in this case, the third indication information may include the index of the maximum value and/or the index of the minimum value.
S1102、接入网设备向核心网设备发送第三指示信息。相应的,核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第三指示信息。S1102. The access network device sends third instruction information to the core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the third indication information from the access network device.
S1103、核心网设备获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。S1103. The core network device obtains the maximum value and/or the minimum value of MBS QFI SN.
作为一种可能的实现,核心网设备可以根据第三指示信息获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。As a possible implementation, the core network device can obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third indication information.
可选的,第三指示信息指示了用于确定该最大值,和/或,最小值的参数时,该步骤S1003可以为:核心网设备根据第三指示信息指示的参数确定该最大值,和/或,最小值。Optionally, when the third indication information indicates the parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value, step S1003 may be: the core network device determines the maximum value according to the parameters indicated by the third indication information, and /or, min.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,接入网设备可以不发送第三指示信息,即上述步骤S1101和S1102为可选步骤。此时,在步骤S1103中,核心网设备可以使用默认的参数值确定MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值;或者使用缺省值(比如缺省参数,固定值)确定MBS QFI  SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。As another possible implementation manner, the access network device may not send the third indication information, that is, the above steps S1101 and S1102 are optional steps. At this time, in step S1103, the core network device can use default parameter values to determine the maximum value and/or minimum value of the MBS QFI SN; or use default values (such as default parameters, fixed values) to determine the MBS QFI The maximum value, and/or the minimum value of SN.
作为又一种可能的实现方式,接入网设备向核心网设备指示了用于确定最大值和/或最小值的部分参数时,用于确定该最大值和/或最小值的另一部分参数可以使用缺省参数或默认的参数值。As another possible implementation manner, when the access network device indicates to the core network device some of the parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value, another part of the parameters used to determine the maximum value and/or the minimum value may be Use default parameters or default parameter values.
在某个MRB仅关联第一QoS流时,可以执行下述步骤S1104a-S1105a;在某个MRB关联第一QoS流和第二QoS流时,可以执行下述步骤S1104b-S1105b。When a certain MRB is only associated with the first QoS flow, the following steps S1104a-S1105a may be performed; when a certain MRB is associated with the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow, the following steps S1104b-S1105b may be performed.
S1104a、核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一数据包。相应的,接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包。S1104a. The core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
其中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于或等于上述MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,大于或等于MBS QFI SN的最小值。Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value of the above-mentioned MBS QFI SN, and/or, is greater than or equal to the minimum value of MBS QFI SN.
也就是说,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的取值范围可以为以下任意一种:[0,最大值]、[最小值,2N-1]、或[最小值,最大值]。That is to say, the value range of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet can be any of the following: [0, maximum value], [minimum value, 2 N -1], or [minimum value, maximum value].
其中,第一数据包为第一QoS流的数据包。Wherein, the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow.
S1105a、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一数据包。相应的,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一数据包。S1105a. The access network device sends the first data packet to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first data packet from the access network device.
可选的,在第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最大值时,或者,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的取值范围为[0,最大值]时,第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值之和,K为HFN的长度。第一数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值。Optionally, when the third indication information indicates the maximum value of MBS QFI SN, or when the value range of MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is [0, maximum value], the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet It is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the offset value. K is the length of the HFN. The PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
在该方式中,可以认为舍弃了使得第一数据包的COUNT值溢出的MBS QFI SN。此外,第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值之和,使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值不会为负值。并且,第一数据包的最大MBS QFI SN为上述最大值,而该最大值可以保证第一数据包的COUNT值不会溢出。因此,在该方式中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。In this method, it can be considered that the MBS QFI SN that causes the COUNT value of the first data packet to overflow is discarded. In addition, the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the offset value, so that the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV will not be a negative value. Moreover, the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is the above-mentioned maximum value, and this maximum value can ensure that the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
可选的,在第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最小值时,或者,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的取值范围为[最小值,2N-1]时,第一数据包的COUNT值等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, when the third indication information indicates the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, or when the value range of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is [minimum value, 2 N -1], the COUNT of the first data packet The value is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first packet.
在该方式中,可以认为舍弃了使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值的MBS QFI SN。进一步的,还可能舍弃了一部分不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值的MBS QFI SN。此外,第一数据包的COUNT值等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,且第一数据包的最大MBS QFI SN为2N-1,使得第一数据包的最大COUNT值为2N-1,避免了第一数据包的COUNT值的溢出。因此,在该方式中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。In this method, it can be considered that the MBS QFI SN that makes the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV be a negative value is discarded. Furthermore, some MBS QFI SNs that will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be negative may also be discarded. In addition, the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is 2 N -1, so that the maximum COUNT value of the first data packet is 2 N -1, The overflow of the COUNT value of the first data packet is avoided. Therefore, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
可选的,在第三指示信息指示MBS QFI SN的最大值和最小值时,第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值之和,第一数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值。或者,第一数据包的COUNT值等于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, when the third indication information indicates the maximum value and minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the value of the K high-order bits and the offset value of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. The sum of the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first packet is equal to the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the first packet. Alternatively, the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet.
与上述分析同理,在该方式中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。In the same way as the above analysis, in this method, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet will not make the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet will not overflow.
S1104b、核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一数据包和第二数据包。相应的,接入网设备 接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包和第二数据包。S1104b. The core network device sends the first data packet and the second data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, access network equipment Receive the first data packet and the second data packet from the core network device.
其中,第一数据包为第一QoS流的数据包。第二数据包为第二QoS流的数据包。Wherein, the first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow. The second data packet is a data packet of the second QoS flow.
其中,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和小于或等于上述MBS QFI SN的最大值;和/或,Among them, the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value of the above MBS QFI SN; and/or,
第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和大于或等于MBS QFI SN的最小值。The sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN.
也就是说,对于某个MRB关联的多个QoS流,该多个QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN之和的取值范围可以为以下任意一种:[0,最大值]、[最小值,2N-1]、或[最小值,最大值]。其中,多个指两个或两个以上,本申请仅是以某个MRB关联两个QoS为例进行说明。That is to say, for multiple QoS flows associated with a certain MRB, the value range of the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the data packets of the multiple QoS flows can be any of the following: [0, maximum value], [minimum value , 2 N -1], or [minimum value, maximum value]. Among them, "multiple" refers to two or more. This application only takes an MRB associated with two QoS as an example for explanation.
S1105b、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一数据包和第二数据包。相应的,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一数据包和第二数据包。S1105b. The access network device sends the first data packet and the second data packet to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first data packet and the second data packet from the access network device.
其中,第一数据包的COUNT值可以参考期望收到的第一QoS流的下一个数据包的MBS QFI SN、期望收到的第二QoS流的下一个数据包的MBS QFI SN、以及偏移值确定。第二数据包的COUNT值的确定方法与第一数据包的COUNT值的确定方法相同。Among them, the COUNT value of the first data packet can refer to the MBS QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received in the first QoS flow, the MBS QFI SN of the next data packet expected to be received in the second QoS flow, and the offset. The value is determined. The method for determining the COUNT value of the second data packet is the same as the method for determining the COUNT value of the first data packet.
可以理解的,无论第一数据包和第二数据包的COUNT值采用何种确定方式,在第一数据包和第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和的取值范围为上述三种范围中的一种时,第一数据包和第二数据包的MBS QFI SN不会使得RX_DELIV的HFN的初值为负值,第一数据包和第二数据包的COUNT值也不会溢出。It can be understood that no matter how the COUNT values of the first data packet and the second data packet are determined, the value range of the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the second data packet is one of the above three ranges. In this case, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the second data packet will not cause the initial value of HFN of RX_DELIV to be a negative value, and the COUNT value of the first data packet and the second data packet will not overflow.
可以理解的,核心网设备在获取MBS QFI SN的取值范围后,MRB和QoS流为一对一的关联关系时,该QoS流的MBS QFI SN可以从该取值范围的下边界开始,随后依次递增,直至该QoS流的MBS QFI SN的取值等于该取值范围的上边界。在该QoS流的MBS QFI SN取值到达上边界后,该QoS流的MBS QFI SN的取值重新从取值范围的下边界开始,以此类推。It is understandable that after the core network device obtains the value range of the MBS QFI SN, when the MRB and QoS flow have a one-to-one relationship, the MBS QFI SN of the QoS flow can start from the lower boundary of the value range, and then Increasingly until the value of the MBS QFI SN of the QoS flow is equal to the upper boundary of the value range. After the MBS QFI SN value of the QoS flow reaches the upper boundary, the MBS QFI SN value of the QoS flow starts again from the lower boundary of the value range, and so on.
MRB和QoS流为一对多的关联关系时,该多个QoS流的MBS QFI SN之和可以从该取值范围的下边界开始,随后依次递增,直至该多个QoS流的MBS QFI SN之和等于该取值范围的上边界。随后,可以重置该多个QoS流中部分或全部QoS流的MBS QFI SN,使得该多个QoS流的MBS QFI SN之和依然从该取值范围的下边界开始,以此类推。When MRB and QoS flows have a one-to-many relationship, the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple QoS flows can start from the lower boundary of the value range, and then increase in sequence until the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple QoS flows The sum is equal to the upper bound of the value range. Subsequently, the MBS QFI SNs of some or all of the multiple QoS flows can be reset so that the sum of the MBS QFI SNs of the multiple QoS flows still starts from the lower boundary of the value range, and so on.
可选的,在接入网设备侧,对于某个MRB,无论该MRB关联一个QoS流还是关联多个QoS流,接入网设备均可以在该MRB的COUNT值等于2N-1后,释放该MRB,并新建另一MRB。Optionally, on the access network device side, for a certain MRB, whether the MRB is associated with one QoS flow or multiple QoS flows, the access network device can release the MRB after the COUNT value of the MRB is equal to 2 N -1 this MRB and create another MRB.
可选的,在某个MRB关联一个QoS流的情况下,接入网设备可以在收到的数据包的MBS QFI SN等于MBS QFI SN的取值范围的下边界后,释放该MRB,并新建另一MRB。或者,接入网设备可以在当前收到的数据包的MBS QFI SN小于上一次收到的数据包的MBS QFI SN时,释放该MRB,并新建另一MRB。Optionally, when an MRB is associated with a QoS flow, the access network device can release the MRB and create a new MRB after the MBS QFI SN of the received data packet is equal to the lower boundary of the MBS QFI SN value range. Another MRB. Alternatively, the access network device can release the MRB and create another MRB when the MBS QFI SN of the currently received data packet is smaller than the MBS QFI SN of the last received data packet.
可选的,在某个MRB关联多个QoS流的情况下,接入网设备可以在收到的该多个QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN之和等于上述取值范围的下边界后,释放该MRB,并新建另一MRB。或者,对于该多个QoS流中的任一QoS流,若当前收到的该QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN小于上一次收到的该QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN,接入网设备也可以释放该MRB,并新建另一MRB。Optionally, when a certain MRB is associated with multiple QoS flows, the access network device can receive the MBS QFI SN of the data packets of the multiple QoS flows after the sum is equal to the lower boundary of the above value range. Release the MRB and create another MRB. Or, for any QoS flow among the multiple QoS flows, if the MBS QFI SN of the currently received data packet of the QoS flow is less than the MBS QFI SN of the last received data packet of the QoS flow, the access network The device can also release the MRB and create another MRB.
其中,新建的MRB和被释放的MRB可以关联相同的QoS流。Among them, the newly created MRB and the released MRB can be associated with the same QoS flow.
基于该方案,接入网设备可以向核心网设备发送第三指示信息,以指示MBS QFI SN的 最大值和/或最小值,使得MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值灵活可变。例如,接入网设备可以根据实际需求,灵活地向核心网设备指示MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值。在接入网设备需要避免COUNT值溢出时,可以向核心网设备指示用于限制COUNT值溢出的MBS QFI SN的最大值,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出,进而降低因COUNT值溢出导致的丢包,提高通信可靠性。Based on this solution, the access network equipment can send the third indication information to the core network equipment to indicate the MBS QFI SN. The maximum value and/or minimum value makes the maximum value and/or minimum value of MBS QFI SN flexible. For example, the access network device can flexibly indicate the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN to the core network device according to actual needs. When the access network equipment needs to avoid COUNT value overflow, it can indicate to the core network equipment the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN used to limit the COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow caused by the MBS QFI SN being too large, thereby reducing the COUNT value overflow. Packet loss caused by overflow improves communication reliability.
或者,接入网设备不发送第三指示信息的情况下,核心网设备也可以获取MBS QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值,同样可以使得该最大值和/或最小值灵活可变。在需要避免COUNT值溢出时,核心网设备可以设置限制COUNT值溢出的MBS QFI SN的最大值,从而减少MBS QFI SN过大导致的COUNT值溢出。Alternatively, when the access network device does not send the third indication information, the core network device can also obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, and can also make the maximum value and/or the minimum value flexibly variable. When it is necessary to avoid COUNT value overflow, the core network equipment can set the maximum value of MBS QFI SN that limits COUNT value overflow, thereby reducing COUNT value overflow caused by excessive MBS QFI SN.
此外,在核心网设备仅获取MBS QFI SN的最小值的情况下,由于数据包的COUNT值等于数据包的MBS QFI SN,而MBS QFI SN最大只能为2N-1,因此,数据包的最大COUNT值也为2N-1,避免了COUNT值的溢出。In addition, when the core network device only obtains the minimum value of MBS QFI SN, since the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, and the maximum MBS QFI SN can only be 2 N -1, therefore, the COUNT value of the data packet The maximum COUNT value is also 2 N -1, which avoids overflow of the COUNT value.
在图11所示方法的一些实施例中,MBS QFI SN的最大值是根据MBS QFI SN的长度N、PDCP SN的长度、或偏移值中的至少一项确定的。其中,该偏移值用于确定数据包的COUNT值的HFN。In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 11, the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value. Among them, the offset value is used to determine the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet.
作为一种可能的实现,MBS QFI SN的最大值,可以满足如下公式:
MBS QFI SNmax=2N-Y
As a possible implementation, the maximum value of MBS QFI SN can satisfy the following formula:
MBS QFI SN max =2 N -Y
其中,MBS QFI SNmax表示MBS QFI SN的最大值,Y为大于1的整数。Among them, MBS QFI SN max represents the maximum value of MBS QFI SN, and Y is an integer greater than 1.
可选的,Y可以为协议定义的或者预设的较大值,例如,在PDCP SN的长度为12比特时,可以定义或设置Y大于或等于4097;在PDCP SN的长度为18比特时,可以定义或设置Y大于或等于262145。若核心网设备无法获知PDCP SN的长度为12比特还是18比特时,可以定义或设置Y大于或等于262145。Optionally, Y can be a larger value defined by the protocol or preset. For example, when the length of the PDCP SN is 12 bits, Y can be defined or set to be greater than or equal to 4097; when the length of the PDCP SN is 18 bits, Y can be defined or set to be greater than or equal to 262145. If the core network device cannot know whether the length of the PDCP SN is 12 bits or 18 bits, you can define or set Y to be greater than or equal to 262145.
或者,Y可以满足如下公式:
Y≥X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]+Q1
Alternatively, Y can satisfy the following formula:
Y≥X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 1
也就是说,
MBS QFI SNmax≤2N-X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-Q1
That is to say,
MBS QFI SN max ≤2 N -X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] -Q 1
其中,X表示偏移值,*表示乘法运算,PDCP-SN-Size表示所述PDCP SN的长度,Q1为大于或等于1的整数。Among them, X represents the offset value, * represents the multiplication operation, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, and Q 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
可以理解的,在偏移值等于1时,MBS QFI SN的最大值满足如下公式:
MBS QFI SNmax=2N-2[PDCP-SN-Size]-Q1
It can be understood that when the offset value is equal to 1, the maximum value of MBS QFI SN satisfies the following formula:
MBS QFI SN max =2 N -2 [PDCP-SN-Size] -Q 1
需要说明的是,在偏移值等于1时,协议中可以不体现该偏移值。接入网设备可以默认偏移值等于1,从而按照偏移值等于1确定数据包的COUNT值。It should be noted that when the offset value is equal to 1, the offset value does not need to be reflected in the protocol. The access network device can default the offset value to be equal to 1, thereby determining the COUNT value of the data packet based on the offset value being equal to 1.
作为另一种可能的实现,MBS QFI SN的最大值,可以满足如下多种公式中的一种:

MBS QFI SNmax=X*Q3-Q0;或
As another possible implementation, the maximum value of MBS QFI SN can satisfy one of the following formulas:

MBS QFI SN max =X*Q 3 -Q 0 ; or
其中,Q0、Q3、Q4、Q5为整数。Among them, Q 0 , Q 3 , Q 4 and Q 5 are integers.
在图11所示方法的一些实施例中,MBS QFI SN的最小值是根据MBS QFI SN的长度N、PDCP SN的长度、或偏移值中的至少一项确定的。In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 11, the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value.
作为一种可能的实现,MBS QFI SN的最小值、PDCP SN的长度可以满足如下两种公式中的一种:
MBS QFI SNmin=2[PDCP-SN-Size]
MBS QFI SNmin=0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1
As a possible implementation, the minimum value of MBS QFI SN and the length of PDCP SN can satisfy one of the following two formulas:
MBS QFI SN min =2 [PDCP-SN-Size]
MBS QFI SN min =0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1
其中,MBS QFI SNmin表示MBS QFI SN的最小值,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,*表示乘法运算。Among them, MBS QFI SN min represents the minimum value of MBS QFI SN, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of PDCP SN, and * represents multiplication operation.
作为另一种可能的实现,MBS QFI SN的最小值、PDCP SN的长度、以及偏移值可以满足如下公式:
MBS QFI SNmin=X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]+Q2
As another possible implementation, the minimum value of MBS QFI SN, the length of PDCP SN, and the offset value can satisfy the following formula:
MBS QFI SN min =X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 2
其中,X表示偏移值,Q2为大于或等于0的整数。Among them, X represents the offset value, and Q 2 is an integer greater than or equal to 0.
作为又一种可能的实现,MBS QFI SN的最小值,可以满足如下多种公式中的一种:
MBS QFI SNmin=X*Q6+Q7

As another possible implementation, the minimum value of MBS QFI SN can satisfy one of the following formulas:
MBS QFI SN min =X*Q 6 +Q 7

其中,Q6、Q7、Q8、Q9为整数。Among them, Q 6 , Q 7 , Q 8 and Q 9 are integers.
可选的,在上述MBS QFI SN的最大值和最小值的计算方式中,若接入网设备未发送第三指示信息,或者,第三指示信息未指示全部参数,那么,核心网设备可以采用默认的参数值进行计算。例如,在计算最大值时,默认的PDCP SN的长度可以为或18;在计算最小值时,默认的PDCP SN的长度可以为18比特。或者,在计算最大值和最小值时,默认的偏移值可以为1。Optionally, in the above calculation method of the maximum and minimum values of MBS QFI SN, if the access network equipment does not send the third indication information, or the third indication information does not indicate all parameters, then the core network equipment can use Default parameter values are used for calculations. For example, when calculating the maximum value, the default PDCP SN length can be or 18; when calculating the minimum value, the default PDCP SN length can be 18 bits. Alternatively, the default offset value can be 1 when calculating maximum and minimum values.
可选的,图11所示方法可以在核心网设备向接入网设备传输MBS业务的数据包之前执行,例如,可以在MBS会话建立过程中执行。当然,也可以在核心网设备向接入网设备传输MBS业务的数据包之前的其他时间执行,本申请对此不做具体限定。Optionally, the method shown in Figure 11 can be executed before the core network device transmits the data packet of the MBS service to the access network device. For example, it can be executed during the MBS session establishment process. Of course, it can also be executed at other times before the core network device transmits the data packet of the MBS service to the access network device, and this application does not specifically limit this.
上述图9至图11所示方法中,均涉及到核心网设备和接入网设备的相关实现。此外,如图12所示,本申请还提供一种通信方法,该通信方法中,主要涉及接入网设备的实现,由接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN或COUNT值满足一定条件时,进行MRB的释放和建立。The above-mentioned methods shown in Figures 9 to 11 all involve the relevant implementation of core network equipment and access network equipment. In addition, as shown in Figure 12, this application also provides a communication method. This communication method mainly involves the implementation of access network equipment. When the MBS QFI SN or COUNT value of the data packet meets certain conditions, the access network equipment , perform the release and establishment of MRB.
需要说明的是,在图12所示的通信方法中,某个QoS流的MBS QFI SN的取值范围为[0,2N-1]。其中,N为MBS QFI SN的长度。此外,图12所示的通信方法,可以在某个QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0增加至2N-1的过程中执行。参见图12,该通信方法包括如下步骤:It should be noted that in the communication method shown in Figure 12, the value range of the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow is [0, 2 N -1]. Among them, N is the length of MBS QFI SN. In addition, the communication method shown in Figure 12 can be executed while the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow increases from 0 to 2 N -1. Referring to Figure 12, the communication method includes the following steps:
S1201、核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一数据包。相应的,接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包。S1201. The core network device sends the first data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first data packet from the core network device.
其中,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一QoS流的数据包。该第一QoS流可以关联第一MRB。第一数据包的MBS QFI SN属于[0,2N-1]。可选的,接入网设备收到第一数据包后,可以通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据包,即第一数据包承载于第一MRB。The first data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow of the MBS service. The first QoS flow may be associated with the first MRB. The MBS QFI SN of the first packet belongs to [0,2 N -1]. Optionally, after receiving the first data packet, the access network device may send the first data packet to the terminal device through the first MRB, that is, the first data packet is carried on the first MRB.
S1202、接入网设备在第一数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放第一MRB,并建立第一QoS流关联的第二MRB。S1202. When the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, the access network device releases the first MRB and establishes the second MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
可选的,该步骤S1202中,在第一数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放第一MRB,可以包括:在第一数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件,且通过第一MRB向终端设备发送第一数据包后,释放第一MRB。Optionally, in step S1202, when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, releasing the first MRB may include: when the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, and through the first After the MRB sends the first data packet to the terminal device, the first MRB is released.
基于该方案,接入网设备在收到的数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放承载该数据包的第一MRB,并新建第二MRB。也就是说,在第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0增加至2N-1的过程中,接入网设备可以执行至少一次MRB的释放与新建。在新建MRB后,该MRB的数据包的COUNT值可以从能够取到的最小值开始。因此,在第一QoS流的MBS QFI  SN从0增加至2N-1的过程中,COUNT值可以至少翻转一次,从而降低COUNT值溢出的风险,提高通信可靠性。Based on this solution, when the MBS QFI SN of the received data packet meets the first condition, the access network device releases the first MRB carrying the data packet and creates a second MRB. That is to say, in the process of increasing the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N -1, the access network device can perform the release and creation of the MRB at least once. After a new MRB is created, the COUNT value of the MRB's data packets can start from the minimum value that can be obtained. Therefore, the MBS QFI of the first QoS flow When SN increases from 0 to 2 N -1, the COUNT value can be flipped at least once, thereby reducing the risk of COUNT value overflow and improving communication reliability.
考虑到MBS业务的数据包通常会大于2N-1个,为了使某个QoS流的MBS QFI SN每次从0增加至2N-1的过程中都能够使用上述步骤S1202进行MRB的释放与新建,在一些实施例中,图12所示的方法还可以包括如下步骤S1203-S1204:Considering that the data packets of the MBS service are usually larger than 2 N -1, in order to make the MBS QFI SN of a certain QoS flow increase from 0 to 2 N -1 each time, the above step S1202 can be used to release and release the MRB. New. In some embodiments, the method shown in Figure 12 may also include the following steps S1203-S1204:
S1203、核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二数据包。相应的,接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第二数据包。S1203. The core network device sends the second data packet to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the second data packet from the core network device.
其中,第二数据包为第一QoS流的数据包。接入网设备收到第二数据包后,可以通过第三MRB向终端设备发送该第二数据包,即第二数据包承载于第三MRB。The second data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow. After receiving the second data packet, the access network device may send the second data packet to the terminal device through the third MRB, that is, the second data packet is carried on the third MRB.
S1204、第二数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时,接入网设备释放第一QoS流关联的第三MRB,并建立第一QoS流关联的第四MRB。S1204. When the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is equal to 2 N -1, the access network device releases the third MRB associated with the first QoS flow and establishes the fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
也就是说,接入网设备可以在MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时,释放当前的MRB,并新建MRB,用于承载后续的数据包。In other words, the access network equipment can release the current MRB and create a new MRB when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 2 N -1 to carry subsequent data packets.
可选的,接入网设备在收到第二数据包之后,可以通过第三MRB向终端设备发送该第二数据包,在该第二数据包发送之后,再释放第三MRB。也就是说,该步骤S1204可以理解为:Optionally, after receiving the second data packet, the access network device may send the second data packet to the terminal device through the third MRB, and then release the third MRB after the second data packet is sent. That is to say, step S1204 can be understood as:
第二数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时,且接入网设备向终端设备发送第二数据包之后,释放第三MRB,并建立第一QoS流关联的第四MRB。When the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is equal to 2 N -1, and after the access network device sends the second data packet to the terminal device, it releases the third MRB and establishes the fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow.
可选的,在第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0至2N-2的过程中,若接入网设备释放并新建过多次MRB,那么第三MRB可以为接入网设备在离当前时刻最近的一次释放新建过程中新建的MRB;若接入网设备释放并新建过一次MRB,那么第三MRB和第二MRB相同。Optionally, during the process of the MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N -2, if the access network device releases and creates multiple MRBs, then the third MRB can be used by the access network device away from the current one. The latest MRB created during the release process; if the access network device has released and created an MRB once, then the third MRB and the second MRB are the same.
以上对图12所示方法的整体流程进行了说明,下面对第一条件进行相关说明。The overall flow of the method shown in Figure 12 has been described above, and the first condition will be explained below.
在图12所示方法的一些实施例中,第一条件和第一数值相关。示例性的,第一条件可以包括以下多项中的一项:In some embodiments of the method shown in Figure 12, the first condition is related to the first value. For example, the first condition may include one of the following items:
(1)第一数据包的MBS QFI SN大于0且整除第一数值;(1) The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value;
(2)第一数据包的MBS QFI SN加1整除第一数值;或者,(2) The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 divides the first value; or,
(3)第一数据包的MBS QFI SN等于第一数值。(3) The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is equal to the first value.
可选的,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN大于0且整除第一数值,也可以理解为:第一数据包的MBS QFI SN大于0且对第一数值取模等于0。第一数据包的MBS QFI SN加1整除第一数值,也可以理解为:第一数据包的MBS QFI SN加1对第一数值取模等于0。Optionally, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value, which can also be understood as: the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and modulo the first value is equal to 0. The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 divides the first value, which can also be understood as: the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet plus 1 modulo the first value is equal to 0.
作为一种可能的实现,第一数值是根据MBS QFI SN的长度,和/或,PDCP SN的长度确定的。As a possible implementation, the first value is determined based on the length of the MBS QFI SN and/or the length of the PDCP SN.
示例性的,第一数值可以满足如下公式(a)-(e)中的一种:
S1=2N-M  (a)
S1=2N-M-1  (b)
S1=2PDCP-SN-Size-1  (c)
S1≥0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1-1  (d)
S1=2N-X*2PDCP-SN-Size-1  (e)
For example, the first numerical value may satisfy one of the following formulas (a)-(e):
S 1 =2 NM (a)
S 1 =2 NM -1 (b)
S 1 =2 PDCP-SN-Size -1 (c)
S 1 ≥0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 -1 (d)
S 1 =2 N -X*2 PDCP-SN-Size -1 (e)
其中,S1表示第一数值,N表示MBS QFI SN的长度,M为正整数,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,*表示乘法运算,X表示偏移值,偏移值用于确定数据包的COUNT值的HFN。 Among them, S 1 represents the first numerical value, N represents the length of the MBS QFI SN, M is a positive integer, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, * represents the multiplication operation, X represents the offset value, and the offset value is used to determine HFN of the packet's COUNT value.
需要说明的是,在第一条件为上述条件(1)时,第一数值可以满足上述公式(a)-(e)中的任意一种;在第一条件为上述条件(2)时,第一数值也可以满足上述公式(a)-(e)中的任意一种;同样,在第一条件为上述条件(3)时,第一数值也可以满足上述公式(a)-(e)中的任意一种。即第一数值可以不因第一条件的不同而不同。It should be noted that when the first condition is the above-mentioned condition (1), the first numerical value can satisfy any one of the above-mentioned formulas (a)-(e); when the first condition is the above-mentioned condition (2), the first value A numerical value can also satisfy any one of the above formulas (a)-(e); similarly, when the first condition is the above-mentioned condition (3), the first numerical value can also satisfy any of the above formulas (a)-(e). any kind. That is, the first numerical value may not be different depending on the first condition.
作为另一种可能的实现,第一数值为预设值。该预设值可以是协议定义的,或者,可以是接入网设备自行确定的。示例性的,该预设值可以为10000。当然,该预设值还可以是其他值,本申请对此不作具体限定。As another possible implementation, the first value is a preset value. The preset value may be defined by the protocol, or may be determined by the access network device itself. For example, the preset value may be 10,000. Of course, the preset value can also be other values, which is not specifically limited in this application.
需要说明的是,根据上述第一条件和第一数值计算得到的释放MRB的位置均落在本申请的保护范围内。即本申请意在保护释放MRB的位置,并不限定该释放MRB的位置是根据上述第一条件和第一数值确定的。It should be noted that the position of the released MRB calculated based on the above first condition and the first numerical value all fall within the protection scope of the present application. That is to say, this application intends to protect the position where the MRB is released, and does not limit the position where the MRB is released to be determined based on the above-mentioned first condition and first value.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值满足上述公式(a)时,第一QoS流的2N个数据包,可以承载于2M个MRB。其中,该2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1。该2M个MRB可以使用相同或不同的配置。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (2) and the first value satisfies the above formula (a), 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on 2 M MRBs. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 . The 2M MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
也就是说,对于第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0至2N-1的2N个数据包,接入网设备可以将该2N个数据包划分为2M段,每段采用一个MRB承载。That is to say, for 2 N data packets with MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N-1 , the access network device can divide the 2 N data packets into 2 M segments, each segment using one MRB carry.
示例性的,假设N等于4,M等于2,则第一数值等于4。如图13a所示,第一QoS流的16个数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至15。其中,加1之后能整除4的MBS QFI SN为:3、7、11、15。For example, assuming N is equal to 4 and M is equal to 2, then the first numerical value is equal to 4. As shown in Figure 13a, the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow range from 0 to 15. Among them, the MBS QFI SNs that can be divided by 4 after adding 1 are: 3, 7, 11, 15.
因此,如图13a所示,接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于3时释放MRB#1,建立MRB#2;在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于7时释放MRB#2,建立MRB#3;在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于11时释放MRB#3,建立MRB#4;数据包的MBS QFI SN等于15时释放MRB#4,建立MRB#5。其中,MRB#5可以用于承载第一QoS流的后续数据包。Therefore, as shown in Figure 13a, the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 3; it releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB# when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 7. 3; When the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 11, MRB#3 is released and MRB#4 is established; when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 15, MRB#4 is released and MRB#5 is established. Among them, MRB#5 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
需要说明的是,本申请中,在数据包的MBS QFI SN(或COUNT值)等于某个值时释放MRB,可以理解为:在数据包的MRB QFI SN(或COUNT值)等于该某个值,且通过该MRB向终端设备发送该数据包后,释放该MRB。或者,可以理解为:在数据包的MBS QFI SN(或COUNT值)等于某个值时,接入网设备可以释放MRB,但是具体的释放时机可能还需要根据其他条件确定。It should be noted that in this application, the MRB is released when the MBS QFI SN (or COUNT value) of the data packet is equal to a certain value, which can be understood as: when the MRB QFI SN (or COUNT value) of the data packet is equal to the certain value , and after sending the data packet to the terminal device through the MRB, release the MRB. Or, it can be understood as: when the MBS QFI SN (or COUNT value) of the data packet is equal to a certain value, the access network device can release the MRB, but the specific release timing may need to be determined based on other conditions.
示例性的,数据包在核心网设备和接入网设备之间可能出现乱序到达的情况。即接入网设备可能先收到MBS QFI SN较大的数据包,后收到MBS QFI SN较小的数据包。此时,若接入网设备收到的某个数据包的MBS QFI SN满足第一条件(记为数据包#A),但是该数据包#A之前的数据包还未收到,接入网设备可以启动定时器。在该定时器到期前,若接入网设备收到了该数据包#A之前的数据包,接入网设备可以向终端设备发送数据包#A及其之前的数据包后,释放MRB。在该定时器到期前,若接入网设备未收到该数据包#A之前的数据包,接入网设备可以在定时器到期后释放MRB。For example, data packets may arrive out of order between the core network device and the access network device. That is, the access network equipment may receive the data packet with the larger MBS QFI SN first, and then the data packet with the smaller MBS QFI SN. At this time, if the MBS QFI SN of a data packet received by the access network device meets the first condition (recorded as data packet #A), but the data packet before the data packet #A has not been received, the access network device The device can start a timer. Before the timer expires, if the access network device receives the data packet before the data packet #A, the access network device can send the data packet #A and the data packet before it to the terminal device, and then release the MRB. Before the timer expires, if the access network device does not receive the data packet before the data packet #A, the access network device can release the MRB after the timer expires.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值满足上述公式(a)的情况中,包括了数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以不执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。Optionally, in the case where the first condition includes the above condition (2) and the first value satisfies the above formula (a), the scenario of releasing and establishing the MRB when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 is included. Therefore, in this case, the access network device may not perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值满足上述公式(a)时,对于每个MRB,该MRB的数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于该数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的取值。该数据包的COUNT值的HFN满足如下公式:
Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (2) and the first value satisfies the above formula (a), for each MRB, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the MRB is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet. The value of the NK low-order bits. The HFN of the COUNT value of this packet satisfies the following formula:
其中,MBS QFI SN表示数据包的MBS QFI SN,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,X表示偏移值,表示向下取整。Among them, MBS QFI SN represents the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, and X represents the offset value. Indicates rounding down.
可以理解的,即为数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的取值。也可以理解为截取MBS QFI SN的前N-[PDCP-SN-Size](即,K)比特。It's understandable, That is, the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet. It can also be understood as intercepting the first N-[PDCP-SN-Size] (ie, K) bits of the MBS QFI SN.
可选的,在数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于该数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的取值,该数据包的COUNT值的HFN满足上述公式(f)的情况下,第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值满足上述公式(a)时确定的释放MRB的位置,也可以通过下述条件确定:Optionally, when the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, and the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet satisfies the above formula (f), the first The conditions include the above condition (2). The position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (a) can also be determined by the following conditions:
第一数据包的COUNT值满足[2K-M-1+X,2N-K-1]时,释放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。When the COUNT value of the first data packet satisfies [2 KM -1+X, 2 NK -1], the first MRB is released and the second MRB is established.
示例性的,以N等于4,X等于1,K等于2,M等于2为例,如图13b所示,第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至3时,相应的COUNT值为4至7。后续在第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为4至7、8至11、12至15时,相应的COUNT值均为4至7。由于[2K-M-1+X,2N-K-1]=[1,3]时,二进制表示为0111,十进制表示为7,因此,接入网设备在数据包的COUNT值等于7时释放并建立MRB。For example, taking N equals 4, is 4 to 7. When the subsequent MBS QFI SNs of the data packets of the first QoS flow are 4 to 7, 8 to 11, or 12 to 15, the corresponding COUNT values are 4 to 7. Since [2 KM -1 + MRB.
可选的,接入网设备在COUNT值等于某个值时释放MRB的情况下,具体的释放时机可以根据终端设备的接收状况确定。示例性的,某个数据包的COUNT值满足释放MRB的条件时,接入网设备可以向终端设备发送该数据包(记为数据包#B)。Optionally, when the access network device releases the MRB when the COUNT value is equal to a certain value, the specific release timing can be determined based on the reception status of the terminal device. For example, when the COUNT value of a certain data packet meets the conditions for releasing the MRB, the access network device can send the data packet (recorded as data packet #B) to the terminal device.
终端设备可以向接入网设备上报成功接收的数据包的COUNT值,在成功接收的COUNT值等于数据包#B的COUNT值时,接入网设备释放MRB。或者,终端设备可以向接入网设备上报RX_DELIV,在该RX_DELIV大于或等于数据包#B的COUNT值时,接入网设备释放MRB。The terminal device can report the COUNT value of the successfully received data packet to the access network device. When the successfully received COUNT value is equal to the COUNT value of data packet #B, the access network device releases the MRB. Alternatively, the terminal device can report RX_DELIV to the access network device. When the RX_DELIV is greater than or equal to the COUNT value of data packet #B, the access network device releases the MRB.
可选的,接入网设备可以向终端设备配置上报成功接收的数据包的COUNT值或RX_DELIV的条件。可参考上述图9所示方法中接入网设备释放第一MRB的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the access network device can be configured to report the COUNT value or RX_DELIV condition of successfully received data packets to the terminal device. Reference may be made to the relevant description of the access network device releasing the first MRB in the method shown in Figure 9, which will not be described again here.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值为预设值时,第一QoS流的2N个数据包,可以承载于多个MRB。其中,该2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1。该多个MRB可以使用相同或不同的配置。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (2) and the first value is a preset value, 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on multiple MRBs. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 . The multiple MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
也就是说,对于第一QoS流的MBS QFI SN从0至2N-1的2N个数据包,接入网设备可以将该2N个数据包划分为多段,每段采用一个MRB承载。That is to say, for 2 N data packets with MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow from 0 to 2 N-1 , the access network device can divide the 2 N data packets into multiple segments, and each segment is carried by one MRB.
示例性的,第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值为预设值为例,假设N等于4,第一数值等于5,则如图13c所示,第一QoS流的16个数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至15。其中,加1之后能整除5的MBS QFI SN为:4、9、14。Exemplarily, the first condition includes the above condition (2). For example, the first value is a preset value. Assume that N is equal to 4 and the first value is equal to 5. As shown in Figure 13c, the 16 data of the first QoS flow The MBS QFI SN of the package is 0 to 15. Among them, the MBS QFI SNs that can be divided evenly by 5 after adding 1 are: 4, 9, 14.
因此,如图13c所示,接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于4时释放MRB#1,建立MRB#2;在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于9时释放MRB#2,建立MRB#3;在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于14时释放MRB#3,建立MRB#4。Therefore, as shown in Figure 13c, the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 4; it releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB# when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 9. 3; When the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 14, MRB#3 is released and MRB#4 is established.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值为预设值的情况中,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可 以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。例如,在图13c所示的示例中,接入网设备在MBS QFI SN等于15时释放MRB#4,并建立MRB#5。其中,MRB#5可以用于承载第一QoS流的后续数据包。Optionally, in the case where the first condition includes the above condition (2) and the first value is a preset value, the scenario in which the MRB is released and established when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not be included. Therefore, in this case, the access network equipment can to perform the above steps S1203-S1204. For example, in the example shown in Figure 13c, the access network device releases MRB#4 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15, and establishes MRB#5. Among them, MRB#5 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值为预设值时,对于每个MRB,该数据包的COUNT值的HFN满足如下公式:
Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (2) and the first value is a preset value, for each MRB, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet satisfies the following formula:
该MRB的数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN满足如下公式:
PDCP SN=[(MBS QFI SN)mod S1]mod(2PDCP-SN-Size)  (h)
The PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the MRB packet satisfies the following formula:
PDCP SN=[(MBS QFI SN)mod S 1 ]mod(2 PDCP-SN-Size ) (h)
其中,MBS QFI SN表示数据包的MBS QFI SN,PDCP-SN-Size表示PDCP SN的长度,S1表示第一数值,X表示偏移值。表示向下取整。Among them, MBS QFI SN represents the MBS QFI SN of the data packet, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, S 1 represents the first value, and X represents the offset value. Indicates rounding down.
可选的,在数据包的COUNT值的HFN满足上述公式(g),该数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN满足上述公式(h)的情况下,第一条件包括上述条件(2),第一数值为预设值时确定的释放MRB的位置,也可以通过下述条件确定:Optionally, when the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet satisfies the above formula (g), and the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the data packet satisfies the above formula (h), the first condition includes the above condition (2), the first The position where the MRB is released when the value is the preset value can also be determined by the following conditions:
第一数据包的COUNT值的HFN满足如下公式(i),PDCP SN满足下述公式(j)时,释放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。

PDCP SN=(S1-1)mod(2PDCP-SN-Size)  (j)
When the HFN of the COUNT value of the first data packet satisfies the following formula (i) and the PDCP SN satisfies the following formula (j), the first MRB is released and the second MRB is established.

PDCP SN=(S 1 -1)mod(2 PDCP-SN-Size ) (j)
示例性的,假设N等于4,第一数值等于5,X等于1,PDCP-SN-Size等于2为例,如图13d所示,第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至4时,相应的COUNT值为4至8后续在第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为5至9、10至14时,相应的COUNT值均为4至8。For example, assume that N is equal to 4, the first value is equal to 5, X is equal to 1, and PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 2. As shown in Figure 13d, the MBS QFI SN of the data packet of the first QoS flow is 0 to 4. When the MBS QFI SN of the data packet in the first QoS flow is 5 to 9 and 10 to 14, the corresponding COUNT value is 4 to 8.
由于PDCP SN=(S1-1)mod(2PDCP-SN-Size)=0时,二进制表示为1000,十进制表示为8,因此,接入网设备在数据包的COUNT值等于8时释放并新建MRB。because When PDCP SN=(S 1 -1)mod(2 PDCP-SN-Size )=0, the binary representation is 1000 and the decimal representation is 8. Therefore, the access network device releases and creates a new data packet when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 8. MRB.
可选的,在数据包的COUNT值的HFN满足公式(i),PDCP SN满足公式(j)的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。Optionally, when the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet satisfies formula (i) and the PDCP SN satisfies formula (j), the scenario in which the MRB is released and established when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not be included. . Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
示例性的,以第一条件包括上述条件(1),第一数值为预设值为例,假设N等于4,第一数值等于4,则如图14所示,第一QoS流的16个数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至15。其中,大于0且能整除4的MBS QFI SN为:4、8、12。For example, assuming that the first condition includes the above condition (1) and the first value is a preset value, assuming that N is equal to 4 and the first value is equal to 4, then as shown in Figure 14, the 16 first QoS flows The MBS QFI SN of the packet is 0 to 15. Among them, the MBS QFI SNs that are greater than 0 and can be evenly divided by 4 are: 4, 8, 12.
因此,如图14所示,接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于4时释放MRB#1,建立MRB#2;在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于8时释放MRB#2,建立MRB#3;在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于12时释放MRB#3,建立MRB#4。Therefore, as shown in Figure 14, the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 4; it releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB# when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 8. 3; When the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 12, MRB#3 is released and MRB#4 is established.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(1),第一数值为预设值的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。例如,在图14所示的示例中,接入网设备在MBS QFI SN等于15时释放MRB#4,并建立MRB#5。其中,MRB#5可以用于承载第一QoS流的后续数据包。 Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (1) and the first value is a preset value, the scenario in which the MRB is released and established when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not be included. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204. For example, in the example shown in Figure 14, the access network device releases MRB#4 and establishes MRB#5 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15. Among them, MRB#5 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(e)时,第一QoS流的2N个数据包,可以承载于两个MRB。其中,该2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1。该两个MRB可以使用相同或不同的配置。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (e), 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on two MRBs. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 . The two MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
示例性的,以第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(e)为例,假设N等于4,X等于1,PDCP-SN-Size等于2,则第一数值等于11,如图15a所示,第一QoS流的16个数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至15。接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于11时释放MRB#1,并建立MRB#2。For example, assuming that the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (e), assuming that N is equal to 4, X is equal to 1, PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 2, then the first value is equal to 11 , as shown in Figure 15a, the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow are 0 to 15. The access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 11.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(e)时,接入网设备执行上述步骤S1202之前,第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值X之和,第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (e), before the access network device performs the above step S1202, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the data packet The sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN and the offset value X, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first MRB packet is equal to the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
接入网设备执行上述步骤S1202之后,第二MRB的数据包的COUNT值最小HFN可以等于P1,最大HFN等于P1+X-1。其中,P1为大于1的整数,P1+X小于2K。即第二MRB的数据包的最小COUNT值可以为[P1,0],最大COUNT值可以为[P1+X-1,2PDCP-SN-Size]。After the access network device performs the above step S1202, the minimum HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB may be equal to P 1 and the maximum HFN may be equal to P 1 +X-1. Among them, P 1 is an integer greater than 1, and P 1 +X is less than 2 K . That is, the minimum COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be [P 1,0 ], and the maximum COUNT value can be [P 1 +X-1,2 PDCP-SN-Size ].
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(e)的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。例如,在图15a所示的示例中,接入网设备在MBS QFI SN等于15时释放MRB#3,并建立MRB#3。其中,MRB#3可以用于承载第一QoS流的后续数据包。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (e), the scenario in which the MRB is released and established when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not be included. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204. For example, in the example shown in Figure 15a, the access network device releases MRB#3 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15, and establishes MRB#3. Among them, MRB#3 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
可选的,对于第一MRB,在第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值X之和,COUNT值的PDCP SN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值的情况下,第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(e)时确定的释放MRB的位置,也可以通过下述条件确定:Optionally, for the first MRB, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet in the first MRB is equal to the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value X, and the PDCP SN of the COUNT value is equal to the data In the case of the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the package, the first condition includes the above condition (3). The position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (e) can also be determined by the following conditions :
第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值等于2N-1时,释放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。When the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to 2 N -1, the first MRB is released and the second MRB is established.
示例性的,以N等于4,X等于1,K等于2为例,如图15b所示,第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至11时,相应的COUNT值为4至15。由于2N-1=15,因此,接入网设备在数据包的COUNT值等于15时释放MRB#1,并建立MRB#2。而2N-1=15时,对应的MBS QFI SN等于11,即图15a和图15b对应的释放MRB的位置相同。For example, taking N equals 4, . Since 2 N -1=15, the access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 15. When 2 N -1=15, the corresponding MBS QFI SN is equal to 11, that is, the corresponding positions of releasing MRB in Figure 15a and Figure 15b are the same.
可选的,第二MRB的数据包的最小COUNT值可以为[P1,0],最大COUNT值可以为[P1+X-1,2PDCP-SN-Size],P1可参考前述相关说明。图15b中以P1和X均等于1为例进行说明。Optionally, the minimum COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be [P 1,0 ], and the maximum COUNT value can be [P 1 +X-1,2 PDCP-SN-Size ]. For P 1 , please refer to the above related information. illustrate. In Figure 15b, P 1 and X are equal to 1 as an example for illustration.
可选的,在数据包的COUNT值等于2N-1时释放并新建MRB的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。Optionally, the scenario where the MRB is released and created when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not include the scenario where the MRB is released and created when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(c)时,第一QoS流的2N个数据包,可以承载于两个MRB。其中,该2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1。该两个MRB可以使用相同或不同的配置。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (c), 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on two MRBs. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 . The two MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
示例性的,以第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(c)为例,假设N等于4,PDCP-SN-Size等于2,则第一数值等于3,如图16a所示,第一QoS流的16个数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至15。接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于3时释放MRB#1,并 建立MRB#2。For example, assuming that the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (c), assuming that N is equal to 4 and PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 2, then the first value is equal to 3, as shown in Figure 16a As shown, the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow are 0 to 15. The access network device releases MRB#1 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 3, and Create MRB#2.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(c)时,接入网设备执行上述步骤S1202之前,第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值X之和,第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值。接入网设备执行上述步骤S1202之后,第二MRB的数据包的COUNT值可以等于该数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (c), before the access network device performs the above step S1202, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the data packet The sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN and the offset value X, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first MRB packet is equal to the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet. After the access network device performs the above step S1202, the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB may be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(c)的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。例如,在图16a所示的示例中,接入网设备在MBS QFI SN等于15时释放MRB#2,并建立MRB#3。其中,MRB#3可以用于承载第一QoS流的后续数据包。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (c), the scenario in which the MRB is released and established when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not be included. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204. For example, in the example shown in Figure 16a, the access network device releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB#3 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15. Among them, MRB#3 can be used to carry subsequent data packets of the first QoS flow.
可选的,对于第一MRB,在第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值X之和,COUNT值的PDCP SN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值的情况下,第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(c)时确定的释放MRB的位置,也可以通过下述条件确定:Optionally, for the first MRB, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet in the first MRB is equal to the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value X, and the PDCP SN of the COUNT value is equal to the data In the case of the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the package, the first condition includes the above condition (3). The position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (c) can also be determined by the following conditions :
第一数据包的COUNT值等于[X,2N-K-1]时,释放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。When the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to [X,2 NK -1], the first MRB is released and the second MRB is established.
示例性的,以N等于4,X等于1,K等于2为例,如图16b所示,第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至3时,相应的COUNT值为4至7。由于N等于4,X等于1,K等于2时[X,2N-K-1]=[1,3],二进制表示为0111,十进制表示为7,因此,接入网设备在数据包的COUNT值等于7时释放MRB#1,并建立MRB#2。而COUNT值等于7时,对应的MBS QFI SN等于3,即图16a和图16b对应的释放MRB的位置相同。For example, taking N equals 4, . Since N equals 4, When equal to 7, MRB#1 is released and MRB#2 is established. When the COUNT value is equal to 7, the corresponding MBS QFI SN is equal to 3, that is, the positions corresponding to the release of MRB in Figure 16a and Figure 16b are the same.
可选的,第二MRB的数据包的COUNT值可以等于该数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
可选的,在数据包的COUNT值等于[X,2N-K-1]时释放并新建MRB的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。Optionally, when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to [X, 2 NK -1], the MRB is released and created. This may not include the scenario where the MRB is released and created when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(d)时,第一QoS流的2N个数据包,可以承载于两个MRB。其中,该2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1。该两个MRB可以使用相同或不同的配置。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (d), 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow can be carried on two MRBs. Among them, the MBS QFI SN of the starting data packet among the 2 N data packets is 0, and the MBS QFI SN of the terminating data packet is 2 N-1 . The two MRBs can use the same or different configurations.
示例性的,以第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(d)为例,假设N等于4,PDCP-SN-Size等于3,则第一数值大于或等于1,如图17a所示,第一QoS流的16个数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至15。接入网设备在数据包的MBS QFI SN等于1时释放MRB#1,并建立MRB#2。For example, assuming that the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (d), assuming that N is equal to 4 and PDCP-SN-Size is equal to 3, then the first value is greater than or equal to 1, such as As shown in Figure 17a, the MBS QFI SNs of the 16 packets of the first QoS flow range from 0 to 15. The access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 1.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(d)时,接入网设备执行上述步骤S1202之前,第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值X之和,第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的PDCP SN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值。接入网设备执行上述步骤S1202之后,第二MRB的数据包的COUNT值可以等于该数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (d), before the access network device performs the above step S1202, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB is equal to the data packet The sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN and the offset value X, the PDCP SN of the COUNT value of the first MRB packet is equal to the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet. After the access network device performs the above step S1202, the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB may be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
可选的,在第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(d)的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。例如,在图17a所示的示例中,接入网设备在MBS QFI SN等于15时释放MRB#2,并建立MRB#3。其中,MRB#3可以用于承载第一QoS流的 后续数据包。Optionally, when the first condition includes the above condition (3) and the first value satisfies the above formula (d), the scenario in which the MRB is released and established when the MBS QFI SN of the data packet is equal to 2 N -1 may not be included. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204. For example, in the example shown in Figure 17a, the access network device releases MRB#2 and establishes MRB#3 when the MBS QFI SN is equal to 15. Among them, MRB#3 can be used to carry the first QoS flow subsequent packets.
可选的,对于第一MRB,在第一MRB的数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与偏移值X之和,COUNT值的PDCP SN等于数据包的MBS QFI SN的N-K个低位比特的值的情况下,第一条件包括上述条件(3),第一数值满足上述公式(d)时确定的释放MRB的位置,也可以通过下述条件确定:Optionally, for the first MRB, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet in the first MRB is equal to the sum of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value X, and the PDCP SN of the COUNT value is equal to the data In the case of the value of the N-K low-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the package, the first condition includes the above condition (3). The position of releasing the MRB determined when the first value satisfies the above formula (d) can also be determined by the following conditions :
第一数据包的COUNT值等于[X,0.5*2PDCP-SN-Size-1]时,释放第一MRB,并建立第二MRB。When the COUNT value of the first data packet is equal to [X,0.5*2 PDCP-SN-Size -1], the first MRB is released and the second MRB is established.
示例性的,以N等于4,X等于1,PDCP-SN-Size等于2为例,如图17b所示,第一QoS流的数据包的MBS QFI SN为0至1时,相应的COUNT值为4至5。由于N等于4,X等于1,PDCP-SN-Size等于2时[X,0.5*2PDCP-SN-Size-1]=[1,1],二进制表示为0101,十进制表示为5,因此,接入网设备在数据包的COUNT值等于5时释放MRB#1,并建立MRB#2。而COUNT值等于5时,对应的MBS QFI SN等于1,即图17a和图17b对应的释放MRB的位置相同。For example, taking N equals 4, is 4 to 5. Since N is equal to 4 , The access network device releases MRB#1 and establishes MRB#2 when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to 5. When the COUNT value is equal to 5, the corresponding MBS QFI SN is equal to 1, that is, the corresponding position of releasing the MRB in Figure 17a and Figure 17b is the same.
可选的,第二MRB的数据包的COUNT值可以等于该数据包的MBS QFI SN。Optionally, the COUNT value of the data packet of the second MRB can be equal to the MBS QFI SN of the data packet.
可选的,在数据包的COUNT值等于[X,0.5*2PDCP-SN-Size-1]时释放并新建MRB的情况下,可能不包括数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时释放并建立MRB的场景。因此,在该情况下,接入网设备可以执行上述步骤S1203-S1204。Optional, when the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to [X,0.5*2 PDCP-SN-Size -1] and a new MRB is released, it may not include the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and is released when it is equal to 2 N -1 And establish the MRB scenario. Therefore, in this case, the access network device can perform the above steps S1203-S1204.
需要说明的是,上述图13a至图17b以MBS QFI SN从0增加至2N-1的一轮过程为例进行说明,或者说针对一轮MBS QFI SN周期为例进行说明。实际应用中,MBS QFI SN的每轮增加过程中,接入网设备均可以采用图12所示的方法释放和新建MRB。It should be noted that the above-mentioned Figures 13a to 17b take a process in which the MBS QFI SN increases from 0 to 2 N -1 as an example, or one MBS QFI SN cycle as an example. In actual applications, during each round of increase of MBS QFI SN, the access network equipment can use the method shown in Figure 12 to release and create new MRBs.
可以理解的,上述实施例以MBS业务场景为例进行说明。当然,本申请实施例所述的方法也可以进行适当的变形以应用到其他场景,例如,应用到单播业务场景,此时,本申请中的MBS QFI SN可以相应替换为单播业务中的QFI SN;或者,可以应用到根据参数A确定参数B,参数A比参数B先达到上限导致的参数B可能溢出的问题。It can be understood that the above embodiment takes the MBS service scenario as an example for description. Of course, the methods described in the embodiments of this application can also be appropriately modified to be applied to other scenarios, for example, to unicast service scenarios. At this time, the MBS QFI SN in this application can be replaced with the MBS QFI SN in the unicast service accordingly. QFI SN; Alternatively, it can be applied to determine parameter B based on parameter A. If parameter A reaches the upper limit before parameter B, parameter B may overflow.
可以理解的是,以上各个实施例中,由接入网设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于该接入网设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片、芯片系统、电路、逻辑模块、或软件例如芯片或者电路)实现;由核心网设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以有可用于该核心网设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片、芯片系统、电路、逻辑模块、或软件例如芯片或者电路)实现。It can be understood that in the above embodiments, the methods and/or steps implemented by the access network equipment can also be implemented by components (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, and logic modules) that can be used in the access network equipment. , or software such as chips or circuits); the methods and/or steps implemented by the core network equipment may also have components that can be used in the core network equipment (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, logic modules, or software Such as chip or circuit) implementation.
上述主要对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的,本申请还提供了通信装置,该通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的接入网设备,或者包含上述接入网设备的装置,或者为可用于接入网设备的部件,例如芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者为可用于核心网设备的部件,例如芯片或芯片系统。The above mainly introduces the solutions provided by this application. Correspondingly, this application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the various methods mentioned above. The communication device may be the access network equipment in the above method embodiment, or a device including the above access network equipment, or a component that can be used in the access network equipment, such as a chip or a chip system; or, the communication device may be The core network equipment in the above method embodiment is either a device including the above core network equipment, or a component that can be used in the core network equipment, such as a chip or a chip system.
可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It can be understood that, in order to implement the above functions, the communication device includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function. Persons skilled in the art should easily realize that, with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving the hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可 以有另外的划分方式。Embodiments of the present application can divide the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiments. For example, functional modules can be divided into corresponding functional modules, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, it can be There are other ways to divide.
可选的,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的接入网设备为例,图18示出了一种接入网设备180的结构示意图。该接入网设备180包括处理模块1801和收发模块1802。Optionally, taking the communication device as the access network device in the above method embodiment as an example, FIG. 18 shows a schematic structural diagram of an access network device 180. The access network device 180 includes a processing module 1801 and a transceiver module 1802.
在一些实施例中,该接入网设备180还可以包括存储模块(图18中未示出),用于存储程序指令和数据。In some embodiments, the access network device 180 may also include a storage module (not shown in Figure 18) for storing program instructions and data.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1802,也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块1802可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1802, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement sending and/or receiving functions. The transceiver module 1802 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1802,可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用于执行上述方法实施例中由接入网设备执行的接收和发送类的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程;处理模块1801,可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由接入网设备执行的处理类(例如确定、生成等)的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1802 may include a receiving module and a transmitting module, respectively configured to perform the receiving and transmitting steps performed by the access network device in the above method embodiments, and/or to support the steps described herein. Other processes of the technology; the processing module 1801 can be used to perform steps of the processing class (such as determination, generation, etc.) performed by the access network device in the above method embodiments, and/or to support the technology described herein. Other processes.
作为一种可能的实现:As a possible implementation:
收发模块1802,用于接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包,第一数据包为多播广播业务MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,第一数据包的MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN小于第一阈值;The transceiver module 1802 is configured to receive the first data packet from the core network device. The first data packet is the data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS service, and the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence of the first data packet. No. QFI SN is less than the first threshold;
收发模块1802,还用于向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于核心网设备设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包。The transceiver module 1802 is also used to send first indication information to the core network device. The first indication information is used by the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow. The MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than Or equal to 0, and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
可选的,处理模块1801,用于生成该第一指示信息。Optionally, the processing module 1801 is used to generate the first indication information.
作为另一种可能的实现:As another possible implementation:
处理模块1801,生成第二指示信息;Processing module 1801, generates second indication information;
收发模块1802,用于向核心网设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于核心网设备释放多播广播业务MBS业务的第一MBS会话,并建立MBS业务的第二MBS会话;或者,第二指示信息用于核心网设备删除第一MBS会话的第一服务质量QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。The transceiver module 1802 is configured to send second instruction information to the core network device. The second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service; or, The second instruction information is used by the core network device to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
作为又一种可能的实现:As yet another possible implementation:
处理模块1801,用于生成第三指示信息,第三指示信息指示多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值;The processing module 1801 is configured to generate third indication information, and the third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN;
收发模块1802,用于向核心网设备发送该第三指示信息。The transceiver module 1802 is configured to send the third indication information to the core network device.
作为再一种可能的实现:As yet another possible implementation:
收发模块1802,用于接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包,第一数据包为多播广播业务MBS的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包;The transceiver module 1802 is configured to receive the first data packet from the core network device, where the first data packet is the data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS;
处理模块1801,用于在第一数据包的MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放第一QoS关联的第一MBS无线承载MRB,并建立第一QoS流关联的第二MRB,第一数据包承载于第一MRB。The processing module 1801 is configured to release the first MBS radio bearer MRB associated with the first QoS when the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, and establish the second MRB associated with the first QoS flow. MRB, the first data packet is carried in the first MRB.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiments can be quoted from the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be described again here.
在本申请中,该接入网设备180以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。 In this application, the access network device 180 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. A "module" here may refer to an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, an integrated logic circuit, and/or others that may provide the above functions. device.
在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到该接入网设备180可以采用图3所示的通信装置300的形式。In some embodiments, in terms of hardware implementation, those skilled in the art can imagine that the access network device 180 may take the form of the communication device 300 shown in FIG. 3 .
作为一种示例,图18中的处理模块1801的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信装置300中的处理器301调用存储器303中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图18中的收发模块1802的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信装置300中的通信接口304来实现。As an example, the function/implementation process of the processing module 1801 in Figure 18 can be implemented by the processor 301 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 303. The function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1802 in Figure 18 can be implemented through the communication interface 304 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 .
在一些实施例中,当图18中的接入网设备180是芯片或芯片系统时,收发模块1802的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的输入输出接口(或通信接口)实现,处理模块1801的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的处理器(或者处理电路)实现。In some embodiments, when the access network device 180 in Figure 18 is a chip or chip system, the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1802 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the processing module The function/implementation process of 1801 can be realized through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
由于本实施例提供的接入网设备180可执行上述方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the access network device 180 provided in this embodiment can perform the above method, the technical effects it can obtain can be referred to the above method embodiment, which will not be described again here.
可选的,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的核心网设备为例,图19示出了一种核心网设备190的结构示意图。该核心网设备190包括处理模块1901和收发模块1902。Optionally, taking the communication device as the core network device in the above method embodiment as an example, FIG. 19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a core network device 190. The core network device 190 includes a processing module 1901 and a transceiver module 1902.
在一些实施例中,该核心网设备190还可以包括存储模块(图19中未示出),用于存储程序指令和数据。In some embodiments, the core network device 190 may also include a storage module (not shown in Figure 19) for storing program instructions and data.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1902,也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块1902可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1902, which may also be called a transceiver unit, is used to implement sending and/or receiving functions. The transceiver module 1902 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1902,可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用于执行上述方法实施例中由核心网设备执行的接收和发送类的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程;处理模块1901,可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由核心网设备执行的处理类(例如确定、生成等)的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1902 may include a receiving module and a sending module, respectively configured to perform the receiving and sending steps performed by the core network device in the above method embodiments, and/or to support the steps described herein. Other processes of the technology; the processing module 1901 can be used to perform steps of the processing class (such as determination, generation, etc.) performed by the core network device in the above method embodiments, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
作为一种可能的实现:As a possible implementation:
收发模块1902,用于向接入网设备发送第一数据包,第一数据包为多播广播业务MBS的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,第一数据包的MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN小于第一阈值;The transceiver module 1902 is configured to send a first data packet to the access network device. The first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS, and the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number of the first data packet QFI SN is less than the first threshold;
收发模块1902,还用于接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息;The transceiver module 1902 is also used to receive the first indication information from the access network device;
处理模块1901,用于根据第一指示信息设置第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包。The processing module 1901 is configured to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow according to the first indication information. The MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. The second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
作为另一种可能的实现:As another possible implementation:
收发模块1902,用于接收来自接入网设备的第二指示信息;处理模块1901,用于根据第二指示信息释放多播广播业务MBS业务第一MBS会话,并建立MBS业务的第二MBS会话;或者,处理模块1901,用于根据第二指示信息删除第一MBS会话的第一服务质量QoS流,并在第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。The transceiver module 1902 is configured to receive the second instruction information from the access network device; the processing module 1901 is configured to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service ; Alternatively, the processing module 1901 is configured to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second indication information, and add the second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
作为又一种可能的实现:As yet another possible implementation:
处理模块1901,用于获取多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值,最大值小于2N-1,最小值大于0,N是MBS QFI SN的长度;收发模块1902,用于发送第一数据包,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于或等于最大值,和/或,大于或等于最小值,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包。The processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN. The maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the MBS QFI SN. Length; the transceiver module 1902 is used to send the first data packet. The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or is greater than or equal to the minimum value. The first data packet is the first quality of service of the MBS service. QoS flow packets.
作为再一种可能的实现:As yet another possible implementation:
处理模块1901,用于获取多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值,最大值小于2N-1,最小值大于0,N是MBS QFI SN的长度;收发模块1902, 用于发送第一数据包和第二数据包,第一数据包为MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,第二数据包为MBS业务的第二QoS流的数据包。其中:第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和小于或等于最大值;和/或,第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和大于或等于最小值,第一QoS流和第二QoS流关联一个MBS无线承载MRB。The processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN. The maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the MBS QFI SN. Length; transceiver module 1902, Used to send a first data packet and a second data packet, the first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the MBS service, and the second data packet is a data packet of the second QoS flow of the MBS service. Where: the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or, the sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet Greater than or equal to the minimum value, the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with an MBS radio bearer MRB.
可选的,处理模块1901,用于获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值,包括:处理模块1901,用于根据收发模块1902接收的第三指示信息获取MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值。Optionally, the processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, including: the processing module 1901 is used to obtain the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN according to the third instruction information received by the transceiver module 1902. , and/or, minimum value.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiments can be quoted from the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be described again here.
在本申请中,该核心网设备190以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。In this application, the core network device 190 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. "Module" here may refer to ASICs, circuits, processors and memories that execute one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到该核心网设备190可以采用图3所示的通信装置300的形式。作为一种示例,图19中的处理模块1901的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信装置300中的处理器301调用存储器303中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图19中的收发模块1902的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信装置300中的通信接口304来实现。In some embodiments, in terms of hardware implementation, those skilled in the art can imagine that the core network device 190 may take the form of the communication device 300 shown in FIG. 3 . As an example, the function/implementation process of the processing module 1901 in Figure 19 can be implemented by the processor 301 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 303. The function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1902 in Figure 19 can be implemented through the communication interface 304 in the communication device 300 shown in Figure 3 .
在一些实施例中,当图19中的核心网设备190是芯片或芯片系统时,收发模块1902的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的输入输出接口(或通信接口)实现,处理模块1901的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的处理器(或者处理电路)实现。In some embodiments, when the core network device 190 in Figure 19 is a chip or chip system, the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1902 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the processing module 1901 The function/implementation process can be realized by the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
由于本实施例提供的核心网设备190可执行上述方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the core network device 190 provided in this embodiment can perform the above method, the technical effects it can obtain can be referred to the above method embodiment, which will not be described again here.
作为一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的接入网设备或核心网设备,还可以使用下述来实现:一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)、控制器、状态机、门逻辑、分立硬件部件、任何其它适合的电路、或者能够执行本申请通篇所描述的各种功能的电路的任意组合。As a possible product form, the access network equipment or core network equipment described in the embodiments of this application can also be implemented using the following: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), Programmable logic device (PLD), controller, state machine, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuit, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。In some embodiments, embodiments of the present application further provide a communication device, which includes a processor and is configured to implement the method in any of the above method embodiments.
作为一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器,用于保存必要的计算机程序和数据。该计算机程序可以包括指令,处理器可以调用存储器中存储的计算机程序中的指令以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然,存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。As a possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a memory. This memory is used to store necessary computer programs and data. The computer program may include instructions, and the processor may call the instructions in the computer program stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to perform the method in any of the above method embodiments. Of course, the memory may not be in the communication device.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括接口电路,该接口电路为代码/数据读写接口电路,该接口电路用于接收计算机执行指令(计算机执行指令存储在存储器中,可能直接从存储器读取,或可能经过其他器件)并传输至该处理器。As another possible implementation, the communication device further includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data reading and writing interface circuit. The interface circuit is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in the memory and may be directly read from memory, or possibly through other devices) and transferred to the processor.
作为又一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括通信接口,该通信接口用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信。As yet another possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a communication interface, which is used to communicate with modules external to the communication device.
可以理解的是,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统,该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that the communication device may be a chip or a chip system. When the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of a chip or may include a chip and other discrete devices. This is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,该计算机程 序或指令被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which computer programs or instructions are stored. The computer program When the program or instructions are executed by the computer, the functions of any of the above method embodiments are implemented.
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。This application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
可以理解,本申请中描述的系统、装置和方法也可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。It can be understood that the systems, devices and methods described in this application can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。另外,本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment. In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,本申请实施例所述的全部或部分流程(或功能)被实现。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。本申请实施例中,计算机可以包括前面所述的装置。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes (or functions) described in the embodiments of this application are implemented. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the medium. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc. In the embodiment of the present application, the computer may include the aforementioned device.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the present application has been described herein in connection with various embodiments, in practicing the claimed application, those skilled in the art will understand and understand by reviewing the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims. Other variations of the disclosed embodiments are implemented. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "an" does not exclude a plurality. A single processor or other unit may perform several of the functions recited in the claims. The mere fact that certain measures are recited in mutually different dependent claims does not mean that a combination of these measures cannot be combined to advantageous effects.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Although the present application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are intended to be merely illustrative of the application as defined by the appended claims and are to be construed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    向接入网设备发送第一数据包,所述第一数据包为多播广播业务MBS的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,所述第一数据包的MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN小于第一阈值;Send a first data packet to the access network device, the first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS, and the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN of the first data packet less than the first threshold;
    接收来自所述接入网设备的第一指示信息;Receive first indication information from the access network device;
    根据所述第一指示信息设置所述第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,所述第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,所述第二数据包为所述第一数据包之后的数据包。The MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow is set according to the first indication information. The MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet. SN, the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  2. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包,所述第一数据包为多播广播业务MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,所述第一数据包的MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN小于第一阈值;Receive the first data packet from the core network device, the first data packet is the data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS service, and the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI of the first data packet SN is less than the first threshold;
    向所述核心网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于所述核心网设备设置所述第一QoS流的第二数据包的MBS QFI SN,所述第二数据包的MBS QFI SN大于或等于0,且小于所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN,所述第二数据包为所述第一数据包之后的数据包。Send first indication information to the core network device, the first indication information is used for the core network device to set the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet of the first QoS flow, and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet QFI SN is greater than or equal to 0 and less than the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet, and the second data packet is the data packet after the first data packet.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
    指示第一MBS无线承载MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值的信息,其中,所述第一MRB为所述第一QoS流关联的MRB;Information indicating that the maximum COUNT value of data packets of the first MBS radio bearer MRB is equal to the second threshold, wherein the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow;
    指示所述第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与所述第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息,其中,M1为正整数;Information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer;
    指示所述第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与所述第二阈值之间的差值的信息;Information indicating the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold;
    所述第一MRB的状态信息;The status information of the first MRB;
    指示所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值的信息;Information indicating that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold;
    指示所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与所述第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息,其中,M2为正整数;或者,Information indicating that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2, where M2 is a positive integer; or,
    指示所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与所述第三阈值之间的差值的信息。Information indicating a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:所述第一MRB的标识、所述第一QoS流的标识、或所述MBS业务的标识。The method of claim 3, wherein the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first MRB, an identifier of the first QoS flow, or an identifier of the MBS service .
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二数据包为第一数据包之后的数据包,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the second data packet is a data packet after the first data packet, including:
    所述第二数据包为所述第一数据包之后的第M3个数据包,M3小于或等于M1+1,M1为第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与第二阈值之间的最大差值,所述第一MRB为所述第一QoS流关联的MRB;或者,The second data packet is the M3th data packet after the first data packet, M3 is less than or equal to M1+1, and M1 is the maximum difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold. value, the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow; or,
    M3小于或等于M2+1,M2为所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与第三阈值之间的最大差值。M3 is less than or equal to M2+1, and M2 is the maximum difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  6. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    接收来自接入网设备的第二指示信息;Receive second indication information from the access network device;
    根据所述第二指示信息释放多播广播业务MBS业务第一MBS会话,并建立所述MBS业务的第二MBS会话;或者,Release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service according to the second instruction information, and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service; or,
    根据所述第二指示信息删除所述第一MBS会话的第一服务质量QoS流,并在所述第一 MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。Delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session according to the second indication information, and perform the Add a second QoS flow to the MBS session.
  7. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    生成第二指示信息;Generate second instruction information;
    向核心网设备发送所述第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于所述核心网设备释放多播广播业务MBS业务的第一MBS会话,并建立所述MBS业务的第二MBS会话;或者,Send the second instruction information to the core network device, where the second instruction information is used by the core network device to release the first MBS session of the multicast broadcast service MBS service and establish the second MBS session of the MBS service; or,
    所述第二指示信息用于所述核心网设备删除所述第一MBS会话的第一服务质量QoS流,并在所述第一MBS会话中添加第二QoS流。The second instruction information is used by the core network device to delete the first quality of service QoS flow of the first MBS session and add a second QoS flow to the first MBS session.
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 6 or 7, characterized in that the second indication information includes at least one of the following:
    指示第一MBS无线承载MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值等于第二阈值的信息,其中,所述第一MRB为所述第一QoS流关联的MRB;Information indicating that the maximum COUNT value of data packets of the first MBS radio bearer MRB is equal to the second threshold, wherein the first MRB is the MRB associated with the first QoS flow;
    指示所述第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与所述第二阈值之间的差值小于或等于M1的信息,其中,M1为正整数;Information indicating that the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold is less than or equal to M1, where M1 is a positive integer;
    指示所述第一MRB的数据包的最大COUNT值与所述第二阈值之间的差值的信息;Information indicating the difference between the maximum COUNT value of the data packet of the first MRB and the second threshold;
    所述第一MRB的状态信息;The status information of the first MRB;
    指示所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN等于第三阈值的信息;Information indicating that the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow is equal to the third threshold;
    指示所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与所述第三阈值之间的差值小于或等于M2的信息,其中,M2为正整数;或者,Information indicating that the difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold is less than or equal to M2, where M2 is a positive integer; or,
    指示所述第一QoS流的最大MBS QFI SN与所述第三阈值之间的差值的信息。Information indicating a difference between the maximum MBS QFI SN of the first QoS flow and the third threshold.
  9. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    生成第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值和/或最小值;Generate third indication information, the third indication information indicates the maximum value and/or the minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN;
    向核心网设备发送所述第三指示信息。Send the third indication information to the core network device.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述最大值小于2N-1,所述最小值大于0,N是所述MBS QFI SN的长度。The method according to claim 9, wherein the maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the length of the MBS QFI SN.
  11. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    获取多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值,所述最大值小于2N-1,所述最小值大于0,N是所述MBS QFI SN的长度;Obtain the maximum value and/or minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN. The maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the MBS QFI SN. length;
    发送第一数据包,所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN小于或等于所述最大值,和/或,大于或等于所述最小值,所述第一数据包为MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包。Send a first data packet, the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value, and/or, greater than or equal to the minimum value, and the first data packet is the first quality of service of the MBS service QoS flow packets.
  12. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    获取多播广播业务MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN的最大值,和/或,最小值,所述最大值小于2N-1,所述最小值大于0,N是所述MBS QFI SN的长度;Obtain the maximum value and/or minimum value of the multicast broadcast service MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN. The maximum value is less than 2 N -1, the minimum value is greater than 0, and N is the MBS QFI SN. length;
    发送第一数据包和第二数据包,所述第一数据包为MBS业务的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包,所述第二数据包为所述MBS业务的第二QoS流的数据包,Send a first data packet and a second data packet, the first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the MBS service, and the second data packet is a data packet of the second QoS flow of the MBS service ,
    其中:in:
    所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与所述第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和小于或等于所述最大值;和/或,The sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is less than or equal to the maximum value; and/or,
    所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN与所述第二数据包的MBS QFI SN之和大于或等于所述最小值,所述第一QoS流和所述第二QoS流关联一个MBS无线承载MRB。The sum of the MBS QFI SN of the first data packet and the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is greater than or equal to the minimum value, and the first QoS flow and the second QoS flow are associated with an MBS wireless bearer MRB. .
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取MBS QFI SN的最大值, 和/或,最小值,包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that: obtaining the maximum value of MBS QFI SN, and/or, minimum value, including:
    接收来自接入网设备的第三指示信息;Receive third indication information from the access network device;
    根据所述第三指示信息获取所述MBS QFI SN的最大值,和/或,所述最小值。Obtain the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN and/or the minimum value according to the third indication information.
  14. 根据权利要求9-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MBS QFI SN的最大值是根据所述MBS QFI SN的长度N、分组数据汇聚协议序列号PDCP SN的长度、或偏移值中的至少一项确定的;或者,The method according to any one of claims 9-13, characterized in that the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN is based on the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the packet data convergence protocol sequence number PDCP SN, or the bias At least one of the transfer values is determined; or,
    所述MBS QFI SN的最小值是根据所述MBS QFI SN的长度N、所述PDCP SN的长度、或所述偏移值中的至少一项确定的;The minimum value of the MBS QFI SN is determined based on at least one of the length N of the MBS QFI SN, the length of the PDCP SN, or the offset value;
    其中,所述偏移值用于确定数据包的COUNT值的超帧号HFN。The offset value is used to determine the superframe number HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MBS QFI SN的最大值,满足如下公式:
    MBS QFI SNmax=2N-Y
    The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN satisfies the following formula:
    MBS QFI SN max =2 N -Y
    其中,MBS QFI SNmax表示所述MBS QFI SN的最大值,Y为大于1的整数。Wherein, MBS QFI SN max represents the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN, and Y is an integer greater than 1.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Y满足如下公式:
    Y≥X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]+Q1
    The method according to claim 15, characterized in that said Y satisfies the following formula:
    Y≥X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 1
    其中,X表示所述偏移值,*表示乘法运算,PDCP-SN-Size表示所述PDCP SN的长度,Q1为大于或等于1的整数。Wherein, X represents the offset value, * represents the multiplication operation, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, and Q 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  17. 根据权利要求14-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MBS QFI SN的最小值、所述PDCP SN的长度满足如下公式中的一种:
    MBS QFI SNmin=2[PDCP-SN-Size]
    MBS QFI SNmin=X*2[PDCP-SN-Size]+Q2;或,
    MBS QFI SNmin=0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1
    The method according to any one of claims 14 to 16, characterized in that the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN and the length of the PDCP SN satisfy one of the following formulas:
    MBS QFI SN min =2 [PDCP-SN-Size] ;
    MBS QFI SN min =X*2 [PDCP-SN-Size] +Q 2 ; or,
    MBS QFI SN min =0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1
    其中,MBS QFI SNmin表示所述MBS QFI SN的最小值,PDCP-SN-Size表示所述PDCP SN的长度,X表示所述偏移值,*表示乘法运算,Q2为大于或等于0的整数。Among them, MBS QFI SN min represents the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, X represents the offset value, * represents multiplication, and Q 2 is greater than or equal to 0. integer.
  18. 根据权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息指示所述MBS QFI SN的最大值时,所述数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于所述数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与所述偏移值之和,K为HFN的长度。The method according to any one of claims 14-17, characterized in that when the third indication information indicates the maximum value of the MBS QFI SN, the HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the HFN of the data packet. The sum of the value of the K high-order bits of MBS QFI SN and the offset value, K is the length of HFN.
  19. 根据权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息指示所述MBS QFI SN的最小值时,所述数据包的COUNT值等于所述数据包的MBS QFI SN。The method according to any one of claims 14-17, characterized in that when the third indication information indicates the minimum value of the MBS QFI SN, the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the MBS QFI of the data packet. SN.
  20. 根据权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息指示所述MBS QFI SN的最大值和最小值时,The method according to any one of claims 14 to 17, characterized in that when the third indication information indicates the maximum value and minimum value of the MBS QFI SN,
    所述数据包的COUNT值的HFN等于所述数据包的MBS QFI SN的K个高位比特的值与所述偏移值之和,K为HFN的长度;或者,The HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet is equal to the sum of the value of the K high-order bits of the MBS QFI SN of the data packet and the offset value, where K is the length of the HFN; or,
    所述数据包的COUNT值等于所述数据包的MBS QFI SN。The COUNT value of the packet is equal to the MBS QFI SN of the packet.
  21. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    接收来自核心网设备的第一数据包,所述第一数据包为多播广播业务MBS的第一服务质量QoS流的数据包;Receive a first data packet from the core network device, where the first data packet is a data packet of the first quality of service QoS flow of the multicast broadcast service MBS;
    所述第一数据包的MBS服务质量流标识序列号QFI SN满足第一条件时,释放所述第一QoS关联的第一MBS无线承载MRB,并建立所述第一QoS流关联的第二MRB,所述第一数据包承载于所述第一MRB。When the MBS quality of service flow identification sequence number QFI SN of the first data packet meets the first condition, release the first MBS radio bearer MRB associated with the first QoS flow, and establish the second MRB associated with the first QoS flow. , the first data packet is carried in the first MRB.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一条件和第一数值相关; The method according to claim 21, characterized in that the first condition is related to a first numerical value;
    其中,所述第一数值是根据MBS QFI SN的长度,和/或,分组数据汇聚协议序列号PDCP SN的长度确定的;或者,Wherein, the first value is determined based on the length of the MBS QFI SN, and/or the length of the packet data convergence protocol sequence number PDCP SN; or,
    所述第一数值为预设值。The first value is a preset value.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一条件包括:The method according to claim 22, characterized in that the first condition includes:
    所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN大于0且整除第一数值;或者,The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is greater than 0 and is evenly divided by the first value; or,
    所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN加1整除第一数值;或者,The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is divided by 1 as the first value; or,
    所述第一数据包的MBS QFI SN等于第一数值。The MBS QFI SN of the first data packet is equal to the first value.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一数值满足如下公式中的一种:
    S1=2N-M
    S1=2N-M-1;
    S1=2PDCP-SN-Size-1;
    S1≥0.5*2[PDCP-SN-Size]-1-1;或,
    S1=2N-X*2PDCP-SN-Size-1
    The method according to claim 22 or 23, characterized in that the first numerical value satisfies one of the following formulas:
    S 1 = 2NM
    S 1 =2 NM -1;
    S 1 =2 PDCP-SN-Size -1;
    S 1 ≥0.5*2 [PDCP-SN-Size]-1 -1; or,
    S 1 =2 N -X*2 PDCP-SN-Size -1
    其中,S1表示所述第一数值,N表示所述MBS QFI SN的长度,M为正整数,PDCP-SN-Size表示所述PDCP SN的长度,*表示乘法运算,X表示偏移值,所述偏移值用于确定数据包的COUNT值的超帧号HFN。Wherein, S 1 represents the first numerical value, N represents the length of the MBS QFI SN, M is a positive integer, PDCP-SN-Size represents the length of the PDCP SN, * represents the multiplication operation, and X represents the offset value, The offset value is used to determine the superframe number HFN of the COUNT value of the data packet.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一QoS流的2N个数据包,承载于2M个MRB,其中,所述2N个数据包中起始数据包的MBS QFI SN为0,终止数据包的MBS QFI SN为2N-1The method according to claim 24, characterized in that 2 N data packets of the first QoS flow are carried in 2 M MRBs, wherein the MBS QFI of the starting data packet in the 2 N data packets is The SN is 0 and the MBS QFI SN of the terminated packet is 2 N-1 .
  26. 根据权利要求21-25任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 21-25, characterized in that the method further includes:
    接收来自所述核心网设备的第二数据包,所述第二数据包为所述第一QoS流的数据包;Receive a second data packet from the core network device, where the second data packet is a data packet of the first QoS flow;
    所述第二数据包的MBS QFI SN等于2N-1时,释放所述第一QoS关联的第三MRB,并建立所述第一QoS流关联的第四MRB,所述第二数据包承载于所述第三MRB。When the MBS QFI SN of the second data packet is equal to 2 N -1, the third MRB associated with the first QoS flow is released, and the fourth MRB associated with the first QoS flow is established. The second data packet carries on the third MRB.
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器;所述处理器,用于运行计算机程序或指令,以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求1、3-5、6、8、11-20任一项所述的通信方法,其中,权利要求3-5引用权利要求1,权利要求8引用权利要求6,权利要求13-20引用权利要求11或12。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes a processor; the processor is used to run a computer program or instructions, so that the communication device executes claims 1, 3-5, 6, 8, The communication method according to any one of 11-20, wherein claims 3-5 refer to claim 1, claim 8 refers to claim 6, and claims 13-20 refer to claim 11 or 12.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器;所述处理器,用于运行计算机程序或指令,以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求2、3-5、7-8、9-10、14-20、21-26任一项所述的通信方法,其中,权利要求3-5引用权利要求2,权利要求8引用权利要求7,权利要求14-20引用权利要求9。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes a processor; the processor is used to run a computer program or instructions, so that the communication device executes claims 2, 3-5, 7-8, The communication method according to any one of 9-10, 14-20, and 21-26, wherein claims 3-5 refer to claim 2, claim 8 refers to claim 7, and claims 14-20 refer to claim 9.
  29. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令或程序,当计算机指令或程序在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1、3-5、6、8、11-20任一项所述的通信方法被执行,其中,权利要求3-5引用权利要求1,权利要求8引用权利要求6,权利要求13-20引用权利要求11或12。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions or programs, and when the computer instructions or programs are run on the computer, the results as claimed in claims 1, 3-5, 6, 8, 11 The communication method according to any one of -20 is implemented, wherein claims 3-5 refer to claim 1, claim 8 refers to claim 6, and claims 13-20 refer to claim 11 or 12.
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令或程序,当计算机指令或程序在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求2、3-5、7-8、9-10、14-20、21-26任一项所述的通信方法被执行,其中,权利要求3-5引用权利要求2,权利要求8引用权利要求7,权利要求14-20引用权利要求9。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions or programs, and when the computer instructions or programs are run on the computer, the results as claimed in claims 2, 3-5, 7-8, 9 -The communication method described in any one of 10, 14-20, and 21-26 is executed, wherein claims 3-5 cite claim 2, claim 8 cites claim 7, and claims 14-20 cite claim 9. .
  31. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机指令;当部分 或全部所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1、3-5、6、8、11-20任一项所述的通信方法被执行,其中,权利要求3-5引用权利要求1,权利要求8引用权利要求6,权利要求13-20引用权利要求11或12。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes computer instructions; when part Or when all the computer instructions are run on the computer, the communication method as described in any one of claims 1, 3-5, 6, 8, 11-20 is executed, wherein claims 3-5 refer to the claims 1. Claim 8 refers to claim 6, and claims 13-20 refer to claim 11 or 12.
  32. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机指令;当部分或全部所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求2、3-5、7-8、9-10、14-20、21-26任一项所述的通信方法被执行,其中,权利要求3-5引用权利要求2,权利要求8引用权利要求7,权利要求14-20引用权利要求9。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes computer instructions; when part or all of the computer instructions are run on a computer, the results as claimed in claims 2, 3-5, 7-8, 9-10 The communication method described in any one of , 14-20, and 21-26 is executed, wherein claims 3-5 cite claim 2, claim 8 cites claim 7, and claims 14-20 cite claim 9.
  33. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括如权利要求27所述的通信装置,以及如权利要求28所述的通信装置。 A communication system, characterized in that the communication system includes the communication device according to claim 27 and the communication device according to claim 28.
PCT/CN2023/086982 2022-04-24 2023-04-07 Communication method and apparatus WO2023207555A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210436049.6 2022-04-24
CN202210436049.6A CN116980838A (en) 2022-04-24 2022-04-24 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023207555A1 true WO2023207555A1 (en) 2023-11-02

Family

ID=88473621

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/086982 WO2023207555A1 (en) 2022-04-24 2023-04-07 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116980838A (en)
WO (1) WO2023207555A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110798408A (en) * 2018-08-02 2020-02-14 华为技术有限公司 Message transmission method and device
US20210127351A1 (en) * 2019-09-26 2021-04-29 Intel Corporation Paging cause determination for inactive device in the 5g system
CN113785511A (en) * 2019-05-02 2021-12-10 诺基亚技术有限公司 Apparatus, method and computer program
WO2021249477A1 (en) * 2020-06-11 2021-12-16 维沃移动通信有限公司 Multicast service switching method and device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110798408A (en) * 2018-08-02 2020-02-14 华为技术有限公司 Message transmission method and device
CN113785511A (en) * 2019-05-02 2021-12-10 诺基亚技术有限公司 Apparatus, method and computer program
US20210127351A1 (en) * 2019-09-26 2021-04-29 Intel Corporation Paging cause determination for inactive device in the 5g system
WO2021249477A1 (en) * 2020-06-11 2021-12-16 维沃移动通信有限公司 Multicast service switching method and device

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CMCC, HUAWEI: "Introduction of NR MBS", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2204261, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. e-Meeting; 20220221 - 20220303, 14 March 2022 (2022-03-14), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052131449 *
PHILIPPE GODIN, NOKIA, NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "Resolution of MRB PDCP Wrap Around issue", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-230450; TYPE DISCUSSION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. 3GPP RAN 3, no. Athens, GR; 20230227 - 20230303, 17 February 2023 (2023-02-17), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052244295 *
PHILIPPE GODIN, NOKIA, NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "Solution for MRB PDCP Wrap Around", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-226490; TYPE DISCUSSION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. 3GPP RAN 3, no. Toulouse, FR; 20221114 - 20221118, 3 November 2022 (2022-11-03), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052223974 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116980838A (en) 2023-10-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12010592B2 (en) Sidelink communications method and apparatus
WO2021204003A1 (en) Business processing method, device and system for proximity service
US20200221538A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
KR20230003065A (en) Bearer configuration method and device, context information management method and device, release method and device, facility
WO2019029643A1 (en) Communication method, base station, terminal device and system
EP3937577A1 (en) Communication method and device
US20190230682A1 (en) Data transmission method, apparatus, and system
WO2020063108A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2016173078A1 (en) Data transfer method and system, and ue having relay function
WO2015058336A1 (en) Device and method for data transmission
WO2016015244A1 (en) Multi-communication-mode transmission method and apparatus
WO2020119013A1 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus
WO2022205234A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20210345195A1 (en) Mobility enforcement in connected wireless state
WO2020063438A1 (en) Method for coordinating repeat transmission
EP3937565A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2012119564A1 (en) Method and device for processing user plane configuration parameters
WO2022001738A1 (en) Mobile edge computing processing method, and related device
WO2022033543A1 (en) Relay communication method, and communication apparatus
WO2023011004A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023207555A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022063187A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022147727A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2017177438A1 (en) Transmission method and apparatus for control information
WO2020259206A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for transmitting parameters

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23794988

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1